main bsc main ver. 7.60 bsc base station controller ver. 7 ... bss base station switch ver. 7.60 bsc...

398
TETRA O&M Program 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 OM program 2001 TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 BS Base Station ver. 7.60 2 BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 Short-form Damm Cellular Systems A/S Møllegade 68 DK-6400 Sønderborg, Denmark. Phone: +45 74423500 FAX: +45 74423330 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Internet: E-mail: www.damm.dk [email protected] Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Upload: hoangdiep

Post on 23-May-2018

309 views

Category:

Documents


4 download

TRANSCRIPT

TETRA

O&M Program

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

OM program 2001

TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00

PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00

PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00

TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60

TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60

API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60

BS Base Station ver. 7.60 2

BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60

BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60

MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60

Short-form

Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Møllegade 68

DK-6400 Sønderborg,

Denmark.

Phone: +45 74423500

FAX: +45 74423330

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31 Internet:

E-mail:

www.damm.dk

[email protected]

Licensed user:

Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description

Address selection

A Display Address selection

AP Select PS421 Address

General commands

M00 Display Welcome Message

M00/A Display all software versions numbers

M00/C Display compiler options

M00/OM Display OM TCP Connection status

M01 Display Description

Alarms

M03 Display Alarm Ports

M03/OUT/n Manual Alarm Level Output Control

M03/OUT/- Stop Manual Alarm Output Control

M03/LED Display LEDs

Network Settings

M06 Display Network parameters

Date/Time

M07 Display date and time

M07/S Display date/time status

PS421 Status

M16 Display PS421 Status

M16/AL Display PS421 Alarm Flags

Debug Queue/File

Page 1 of 3Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

M46 Display Debug Queue/File status

M46/C Clear Debug Queue

M46/S Save Debug Queue in File

GUI OM Command

M50 Display Last GUI OM Command/Response

M50/cc..c Execute GUI OM Command

CPLD

M62 Display CPLD Version

M62/HWSIG Display CPLD Hardware Signature

M62/RAM Read CPLD Test RAM

M62/RAM/hhhh Write/Read CPLD Test RAM

M62/INPORT Display Input Port

M62/ALPORT Display Alarm Port

CPU load

M66 Display CPU load

M66/C Clear CPU Load Peak Hold

M66/T Display 1msec. Timer

M66/Q Display QPC Timer

PS421 Program Download

M68 Display Program Download Status

M68/PS421 Display PS421 Program Download Status

M68/PS421/+ Start PS421 Program Download

I/O Memory

M69 Display I/O Memory Configuration

M69/hhhh/1 Read I/O Memory Byte

M69/hhhh/2 Read I/O Memory 16-bit word

M69/hhhh/hh Write I/O Memory Byte

M69/hhhh/hhhh Write I/O Memory 16-bit word

System configuration

M70 Display last File Save result

M70/SAVE Save Main Configuration

Page 2 of 3Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Main configurations

M71 Display Main Configuration

M71/DESCR/cc..c Change description

M71/IPADDR/ccc/... Change IP address

M71/POS/GPS/s Change Position update from GPS

M71/POS/... Change Position

M71/GPSTIME/s Change Date/Time update from GPS

PS421 configuration

M76 Display PS421 Configuration

M76/PS421 Setup PS421 configuration

M76/REMOVE Remove PS configuration

M76/PSADDR/nn Change PS421 Address

M76/BSCn/... Change BSC IP address

Factory configuration commands

M90 Display Factory Configuration status

M90/FACTORYUNLOCK Select Factory Configuration unlock

M90- Deselect Factory Configuration unlock

M90/SAVE Save Factory Configuration

Hardware Versions

M91 Display Hardware Versions

M91/ITEM/cc..c Change item number

M91/SER/cc..c Change serial number

M91/VER/n.nn Change version number

M91/REV/n Change revision number

BSC412 Factory Configuration

M92 Display BSC412 Factory Configuration

M92/GPSRX/c Change GPS RX type

Restart Commands

M99 Display command function

M99/STOP Stop BSC Service

M99/RESTART Restart BSC service

M99/UPDATE/RESTART Restart BSC service with Update

M99/BACKUP/UPDATE/RESTART Restart BSC service with Backup and Update

M99/RESTORE/RESTART Restart BSC service with Restore

Page 3 of 3Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description

General commands

F00 Display Software Version

F00/BSC Display OM Red. BSC Connection status

BSC Activation Control

F02 Display BSC Activation Status

F02/ACTIVATE BSC Activation Request

F02/STANDBY/s Change Forced BSC Standby

Alarms

F03 Display BS Alarm state

F03/C Clear all BS alarms

Radio Cell Status

F13 Display Radio Cell Status

Power Supply Status

F14 Display Power Supply Status

TR Status

F15 Display TR Status

F15/c Display TR Status

F15/nn/A Display TR Alarm Flags

PS411 Status

F16 Display PS Status

F16/nn Display PS Status

F16/AL Display PS411 Alarm Flags

F16/REC Display PS411 Rectifier status

Page 1 of 3Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

F16/OUT Display PS411 +14V/+26V status

F16/LED Display PS411 LED status

BSS Message test queue

F63 Display BSS Link Status

F63/N Display next BSS message

F63/N+ Display next BSS message extended

F63/S Set BSS message test queue to start

F63/C Clear BSS message test queue

F63/s BSS Message suppression

F63/hh/hh..hh Send Message to BSS

UDP Message test queue

F64 Display UDP Link Status

F64/N Display next UDP message

F64/N+ Display next UDP message extended

F64/S Set UDP message test queue to start

F64/C Clear UDP message test queue

F64/s UDP Message suppression

F64/hh/hh..hh Send Message to Redundant BSC

TR Message test queue

F65 Display TR Link Status

F65/TCP Display TR TCP Connections

F65/N Display next TR message

F65/N+ Display next TR message extended

F65/S Set TR message test queue to start

F65/C Clear TR message test queue

F65/s TR Message suppression

F65/nn/hh/hh..hh Send Message to TR

BSC configuration

F70 Display last File Save result

F70/SAVE Save BSC Configuration

System configurations

F71 Display Common Configurations

F71/CNFG/+ Activate BSC

F71/CNFG/- Deactivate BSC

F71/BSCNO/n Change BSC Number

F71/REDBSC/s Change Redundant BSC Selection

F71/REDBSC/... Change Redundant BSC IP Address

Page 2 of 3Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

F71/BSS/... Change BSS IP Address

F71/BSS/nnnnn Change BSS Remote Port

F71/BSS/c Change BSS Message Protocol

TR Configuration

F75 Display TR Configuration

F75/nn/TR412 Add TR412 Transceiver

F75/nn/TR421 Add TR421 Transceiver

F75/nn/REMOVE Remove TR

PS Configuration

F76 Display PS Configuration

F76/nn/PS411 Add PS411 Power Supply

F76/nn/PS421 Add PS421 Power Supply

F76/nn/REMOVE Remove PS

Page 3 of 3Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Software Versions:

S00 Display software version

S00/C Display BSS compiler options

License Dongle:

S04 Display License Dongle Settings

S04/I Display License Dongle Info

S04/D Display License Dongle Memory in Decimal

S04/H Display License Dongle Memory in Hex

System Nodes status:

S10 Display Network Status

S10/c.. Display Node Lists

S10/nnn/nn/s/c.. Display Node Lists

S10/nnn/c/c.. Display one Node BSC

S10/CLEAR Clear Node Message Sequence Error Counters

Log Server status:

S10/LS Display Log Servers

S10/LS/c.. Display Log Server Lists

S10/LS/CLEAR Clear Log Server Message Sequence Error Counters

S10/QUE Display Node Output Queues

Node Status:

S11 Display Node Alarm Status

Tetra Cell Status:

S12 Display Tetra Cell Status

S12/CNT Display Tetra Timeslot Counts

S12/TS Display Tetra Timeslot Status

S12/TS/cc/s Tetra Timeslot Operator Blocking/Deblocking

S12/TS/cc/n/s Tetra Timeslot Operator Blocking/Deblocking

S12/TR Display Tetra TR Status List

S12/NC Display Tetra Neighbour Cell List

S12/PD Display Tetra Packet Data Counters

S12/PD/C Clear Tetra Packet Data Counters

Page 1 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S12/CCK/c Tetra CCK change request

Voice Gateway Status:

S13 Display Voice Gateway Status

S13/L Display Voice Gateway Status List

S13/nnn Display Voice Gateway Instance Status

Packet Data Gateway Status:

S14 Display Packet Data Gateway Status

S14/N Display Packet Data Gateway Counters

S14/C Clear Packet Data Gateway Counters

Application Gateway Status:

S15 Display Application Gateway Status

S15/L Display Application Gateway Connection List

S15/IX/nnn Display Application Gateway Connection (Index)

S15/SSI/nnnnnnnn Display Application Gateway Instance (SSI)

S15/USERNO/nn..n Display Application Gateway Connection (User

Number)

Terminal Gateway Status:

S16 Display Terminal Gateway Status

S16/L Display Terminal Gateway Connection List

S16/IX/nnn Display Terminal Gateway Connection (Index)

S16/SSI/nnnnnnnn Display Terminal Gateway Connection (SSI)

S16/USERNO/nn..n Display Terminal Gateway Connection (User Number)

Subscriber Register:

S20 Display Subscriber Register

S20/S Display Subscriber Register Status

S20/CNT Display Subscriber Register Counts

S20/CKS Display Subscriber Register Checksums

S20/DL Display Master Subscriber Register Download status

S20/REG Display Subscriber Registration Update status

S20/REG/+ Start Subscriber Registration Update

S20/TEI/nnn..n Find TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

S20/SIM/nnn..n Find SIM Card Identity

S20/SECSET Display Security Set Renew Status

S20/SECSET/RENEW Start Security Set Renewal

S20/SAVE Save Subscriber Register to OM command file

S20/READ Read Subscriber Register from OM command file

S20/CHECK Subscriber Register consistency check

Page 2 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S20/QUE Display Subscriber Register queues

Profile Register:

S21 Display Profile Register Status

S21/nnnn Display Profile

S21/L/nnnn/snn/nn Display Profile list

S21/nnnn/ADD/nnn/cc..c Add/Change Profile

S21/nnnn/ASSORG Display Associated Organizations

S21/nnnn/ASSORG/s Change use of Associated Organizations

S21/nnnn/ASSORG/nnn/s Add/Remove Associated Organization

S21/nnnn/SSICALL/s Setup SSI Call Permission

S21/nnnn/SSIGROUP/s Use SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group

Calls

S21/nnnn/SECMODE/n Setup Security Mode

S21/nnnn/SECKSG/nn Setup Key Stream Generator

S21/nnnn/SHORTNO/n/nn..n Setup Short Number Format

S21/nnnn/DISPNO/nnnnnnn Setup Dispatcher User Number

S21/nnnn/PRIORITY/nn Select Call Priority

S21/nnnn/PRIORITY/- Select Mobile controlled Call Priority

S21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/nn.n Set Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout

S21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/- Disable Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout

S21/nnnn/GROUPTIMEOUT/nn Set Group Call Inactivity Timeout

S21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/nnn Set max. Call Duration

S21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/- Set Call Duration limit to infinity

S21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/nnn Set max. PTT Duration

S21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/- Disable PTT Duration limit

S21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/nn Set Late Entry Timer

S21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/- Disable Late Entry Timer

S21/nnnn/CLASS/M Setup Subscriber Class Mobile controlled

S21/nnnn/CLASS/ss... Setup Subscriber Class Network controlled

S21/nnnn/SERVRESTR Display SSI Service Restrictions

S21/nnnn/SERVRESTR/s Change SSI Service Restriction activation

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/c Display Service Permission flags

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/nn/c Change Mobile SSI Service Permission flag

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/nn/s Change Dial-In SSI Service Permission flag

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/nn/s Change Application SSI Service Permission flag

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/nn/s Change Terminal SSI Service Permission flag

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/cc..c Change all Mobile SSI Service Permission flags

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/ss..s Change all Dial-In SSI Service Permission flags

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/ss..s Change all Application SSI Service Permission

flags

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/ss..s Change all Terminal SSI Service Permission flags

S21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR Display Group Call Restriction mode

S21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR/s Change Group Call Restriction mode

S21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/ADD/sAdd/Change Group Permission Table entry

S21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/REMRemove Group Permission Table entry

S21/nnnn/CELL Display Radio Cell Restrictions

S21/nnnn/CELL/s Activate/Deactivate Radio Cell Restrictions

S21/nnnn/CELL/nnn/ss..s Setup Radio Cell Permissions

S21/nnnn/VGNODE/n/nnn Setup Voice Gateway Node

S21/nnnn/PGNODE/n/nnn Setup Packet Data Gateway Node

S21/nnnn/POSUSERNO/n/nn..n Setup Position Destination User Number

Page 3 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/DNS/... Setup DNS Server IP Address

S21/nnnn/DEL Delete Profile

Subscriber Register SSI:

S22 Display SSI Register Status

S22/nnnnnnnn Display SSI

S22/L/nnnnnnnn/snn/nn Display SSI list

S22/nnnnnnnn/REG Display SSI Registration

S22/nnnnnnnn/REG/GROUP Display SSI Attached Groups

S22/TSI/... Display TSI

S22/TSI/.../L Display TSI Chain List

S22/TSICHAIN/nnnnnn Display TSI Chain List

S22/TSIIXTB Display TSI Indax Table

S22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI

S22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI

S22/nnnnnnnn/DESCR/... Setup SSI Description

S22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/... Setup Visiting TSI

S22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/- Clear Visiting TSI

S22/nnnnnnnn/BLOCK/s Change SSI Blocking

S22/nnnnnnnn/PINCODE/cc..c Change PIN Code

S22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/... Setup TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

S22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/- Clear TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

S22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/... Setup SIM ID

S22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/- Clear SIM ID

S22/nnnnnnnn/AUTHDIS/s Change Mobile Authentication Disable Flag

S22/nnnnnnnn/AIEDIS/s Change Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag

S22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/R Renew Security Set from Security Key

S22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/... Setup Security Set

S22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/C Clear Security Set

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPTEXT/cc..cSetup Group Text Line

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL Display Group Include Table

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/s Enable/Disable Group Include Table

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/ADDAdd/Change Group Include Table entry

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/REMRemove Group Include Table entry

S22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRF/c Change Call Transfer

S22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFNO/cc..cChange Call Transfer Number

S22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFTIME/nnChange Call Transfer delay time

S22/nnnnnnnn/SUBREG/s Change Subscriber Register change permission

S22/nnnnnnnn/DISCREETLIST/sChange Discreet Listening permission

S22/nnnnnnnn/AMBIENCELIST/sChange Ambience Listening permission

S22/nnnnnnnn/TEMPENDIS/s Change Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable permission

S22/nnnnnnnn/PERMDIS/s Change Permanent Mobile Disable permission

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPMAN/s Change Mobile Group Management permission

S22/nnnnnnnn/NUMBERMOD/s Change Number Modification Permission

S22/nnnnnnnn/EMERGPRI/nn Change Emergency Number Call Priority

S22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET Display Target Table

S22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/c Display Targets

S22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/n/c/c/c/cc..cAdd/Change/Remove Target

S22/nnnnnnnn/DEL Delete SSI

Page 4 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Subscriber Register User Number:

S23 Display SSI Register Status

S23/nnnnnnn Display User Number

S23/L/nnnnnnn/snn/nn Display User Number list

Subscriber Register IP Address:

S24 Display SSI Register Status

S24/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnn Display IP Address

S24/L/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/snn/nnDisplay IP Address list

Security Key Register:

S25 Display Key Register Status

S25/T/hh..h Display TEI Key

S25/S/hh..h Display SIM Key

S25/I/nn..n Display SSI Key

S25/T/hhh..h/c/... Add/Change TEI Key

S25/S/hhh..h/c/... Add/Change SIM Key

S25/I/nn..n/c/... Add/Change SSI Key

S25/T/hhh..h/DEL Delete TEI Key

S25/S/hhh..h/DEL Delete SIM Key

S25/I/nn..n/DEL Delete SSI Key

S25/RELOAD Reload Key File from Disk

S25/SAVE Save Key Register in OM command file

S25/READ Read Key Register from OM command file

S25/IMPORT/cc..c Import Mobile Programmer File

S25/QUE Display File Write Queue

Organization Register:

S26 Display Organization Register Status

S26/nnn Display Organization

S26/L/nnn/snn/nn Display Organization list

S26/nnn/ADD/cc..c Add/Change Organization

S26/nnn/PROFNO/... Change Profile Number range

S26/nnn/SSI/... Change SSI range

S26/nnn/USERNO/... Change User Number range

S26/nnn/IPADDR/... Change IP Address range

S26/nnn/PUBLRESTR/s Change Publish Restriction flag

S26/nnn/NODERESTR/s Change Node Status Restriction flag

S26/nnn/DEL Delete Organization

Audio Messages

S30 Display Audio Message status

S30/R Reload Audio Messages from disk

Page 5 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TetraFlex Shares

S31 Display TetraFlex Shares

S31/nn Display TetraFlex Share

S31/nn/nnnn-nn-nn Change Version Date

InterNode OM Command

S50 Display Command function

S50/D Display last received OM Command/Response

S50/ccc/cc..c Send OM Command to other Node(s)

Application Gateway Subscriber Register Command

S51 Display Command function

S51/D Display last API Command/Response

S51/nnnnnnnn/cc..c Execute API Command

Log Server Message test queue:

S64 Display Log Server Connection Status

S64/N Display next Log Server message

S64/N+ Display next Log Server message extended

S64/S Set Log Server message test queue to start

S64/C Clear Log Server message test queue

S64/s Log Server Message suppression

S64/hh/hh..hh Send message to Home Log Servers

S64/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/hh/hh..hhSend message to Log Servers

Internode Control Message test queue:

S65 Display Internode Connection status

S65/N Display next Internode Control Message

S65/N+ Display next Internode Control Message extended

S65/S Set Internode Control Message test queue to start

S65/C Clear Internode Control Message test queue

S65/s Internode Control Message suppression

S65/ALL/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to all Nodes

S65/SD/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to Subscriber Register

Download Nodes

S65/DL/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to Discreet Listening Nodes

S65/nnn/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to specific Node

S65/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/hh/hh..hhSend Control Message to specific IP Address

Page 6 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSS Configuration Commands:

S70 Display last file save result

S70/SAVE Save BSS Configuration

General Node configuration:

S71 Display General Node configuration

S71/NODENO/nnn Change Node Number

S71/IP/MCADDR/... Change Multicast Base IP Address

S71/IP/MCPORT/nnnnn Change Control Multicast Port Number

S71/IP/UCPORT/nnnnn Change Control Unicast Port Number

S71/IP/LOGADDR/... Change Log Multicast IP Address

S71/IP/LOGPORT/nnnnn Change Log UDP Port Number

S71/IP/CMOIPADDR/... Change CMoIP Multicast IP Address

S71/MCC/nnnn Change Mobile Country Code

S71/MNC/nnnnn Change Mobile Network Code

S71/NODETIMEOUT/nnnn Change Inter-node Timeout

S71/MULTIVOCODER/s Change Multivocoder selection

S71/VOICEBUF/n Change Voice Buffer length

S71/SUBIPADDR/... Change Subscriber IP Address Segment

S71/SUBMODE/c Change Subscriber Register Mode

S71/KEYREG/s Key Register activation

S71/SHARENAME/cc..c Share Name

S71/SHAREUSER/cc..c Share User

S71/SHAREPASSWORD/cc..c Share Password

S71/TR Display TR Use

S71/TR/nn/s Change TR Use

Tetra Cell Configuration:

S72 Display Tetra Cell configuration

S72/CNFG/+ Activate Tetra Cell

S72/CNFG/- Deactivate Tetra Cell

S72/BSPWR/+nn.n Change Tetra BS Output Power

S72/BSPWR/- Set Tetra BS Output Power to TR Controlled

S72/BSPWR/RED/+nn.n Change Tetra BS Reduced Output Power

S72/BSPWR/RED/- Set Tetra BS Reduced Output Power to TR Controlled

S72/BSPWR/RED/N Set Tetra BS Reduced Output Power to Normal

S72/SCCH/n Change number of SCCH to setup

S72/PDCH/nn Change minimum number of PDCH

S72/FALLBACK/s Change Fallback Mode Indication

S72/MSPWR/n Change max. MS TX Power

S72/MSACC/nn Change min. MS RX Access Level

S72/ACCPAR/nn Radio Access Parameter

S72/DLTO/nn Change Radio Downlink Timeout

Page 7 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/CONNTIMEOUT/n Change Connection Timeout

S72/CLASS/ss... Change Subscriber Class

S72/AIE/s Change Air Interface Encryption activation

S72/NCSYNC/c Change Neighbour Cell Synchronization

S72/SRT/nn Change Slow Reselect Threshold above Fast

S72/FRT/nn Change Fast Reselect Threshold

S72/SRH/nn Change Slow Reselect Hysteresis

S72/FRH/nn Change Fast Reselect Hysteresis

S72/TR Display Tetra TR Configuration

S72/TR/AUTO/s Change Tetra Auto Convert Flag

S72/TR/BI/nn/n/n/s Change Tetra Band Info for all TR

S72/TR/nn/FREQ/... Change Tetra TR Frequencies

S72/TR/nn/BI/... Change Tetra TR Band Info

S72/TR/nn/CN/... Change Tetra TR Carrier Number

S72/NC Display Tetra Neighbour Cell configuration list

S72/NC/+ Activate Tetra Neighbour Cell configuration list

S72/NC/- De-activate Tetra Neighbour Cell List

S72/NC/nnn/+ Add Tetra Neighbour Cell to list

S72/NC/nnn/- Remove Tetra Neighbour Cell from list

Voice Gateway configuration:

S73 Display Voice Gateway configuration

S73/CNFG/+ Activate Voice Gateway

S73/CNFG/- Deactivate Voice Gateway

S73/ORG/ccc Change Voice Gateway Organization Number

S73/CALLMAX/nnn Change max. number of Voice Gateway calls

S73/PRIORITY/nn Change PABX->Tetra Call Priority

S73/REG/s Change Voice Gateway Registration Selection

S73/NAME/cc..c Change Voice Gateway Registration Name

S73/PASSWORD/cc..c Change Voice Gateway Registration Name

S73/IPADDR/... Change Voice Gateway Remote IP Address

S73/PORT/LOC/nnnnn Change Voice Gateway Local IP Port

S73/PORT/REM/nnnnn Change Voice Gateway Remote IP Port

Packet Data Gateway configuration:

S74 Display Packet Data Gateway configuration

S74/CNFG/+ Activate Packet Data Gateway

S74/CNFG/- Deactivate Packet Data Gateway

S74/RIP/s Change Packet Data Gateway RIP selection

Application Gateway configuration:

S75 Display Application Gateway configuration

S75/CNFG/+ Activate Application Gateway

S75/CNFG/- Deactivate Application Gateway

S75/CONNMAX/nnn Change max. Application Gateway connections

S75/STREAMMAX/nnn Change max. Application Gateway Circuit Mode

Streams

Page 8 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S75/CONNTIMEOUT/nnn Connection Timeout

S75/DISCRLIST/s Change Application Gateway Discreet Listening

Terminal Gateway configuration:

S76 Display Terminal Gateway configuration

S76/CNFG/+ Activate Terminal Gateway

S76/CNFG/- Deactivate Terminal Gateway

S76/CONNMAX/nnn Change max. Terminal Gateway connections

S76/STREAMMAX/nnn Change max. Terminal Gateway Circuit Mode Streams

S76/CONNTIMEOUT/nnn Connection Timeout

Page 9 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description

BS Address selection

BSC41x UART Address selection

AU Display BSC41x UART selection

AU+ Select BSC41x UART Address

AU- Deselect BSC41x UART Address

AU/FORCED Forced BSC41x UART Address select

Device Address selection

A Display Address

Ann Select BS41x TR Address

APnn Select BS41x PS Address

ATnn Select BS41x TC Address

Software Version:

H00 Display software version

H00/A Display all software version numbers

H00/C Display compiler options

H00/OM Display OM TCP Connection status

H00/BSC Display OM BSC Connection status

BS Activation Control

H02 Display BS Activation Status

H02/ACTIVATE BS Activation Request

H02/STANDBY/s Change Forced BSC Standby

Alarms

H03 Display BS Alarm state

H03/A Display BSC Alarm Flags

H03/IN Display Alarm Inputs

Page 1 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Synchronization Status

H12 Display Synchronization Status

H12/IN Display Sync Inputs

H12/MASTER Display Master Table

H12/PPS Display 1PPS Inputs

H12/HIST Display OCXO Sync History

BS Antenna Status

H13 Display Radio Cell Antenna Status

TR Status

H15 Display TR Status

H15/c Display TR Status

H15/nn/A Display TR Alarm Flags

PS Status

H16 Display PS Status

H16/AL Display PS411 Alarm Flags

H16/REC Display PS411 Rectifier status

H16/OUT Display PS411 +14V/+26V status

H16/LED Display PS411 LED status

H16/nn Display PS411 Status

OCXO:

H31 Display OCXO Sync

H31/IN/c Change Sync Input selection

H31/SET Set OCXO Free Run adjust value to current DAC

value

H31/SET/nn.nnn Set OCXO Free Run value

H31/SAVE Save OCXO Free Run adjust value in Flash

H31/STEP/nn.nnn Simulate a PLL Frequency Step

Internal GPS RX:

H32 Display Internal GPS RX Status

H32/VER Display GPS Module Version

H32/N Display next Internal GPS message

H32/SETUP Setup GPS RX Module

H32/SEND/cc..c Send Command to GPS RX Module

Page 2 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

CMoIP Switch

H34 Display all CMoIP Connections

H34/nn/n Display one CMoIP Connection

H34/nn/n/... CMoIP Multicast Connect

H34/nn/n/REL CMoIP Multicast Release

H34/C Clear Message Counters

Message Trace:

H48 Display Message Trace

H48- Stop all Message Traces

H48/C Clear Trace Counters

H48/UDP/+ Activate Trace output to UDP

H48/UDP/- Stop Trace output to UDP

H48/UDP/nnn... Change Trace UDP address+port

H48/FILE/+ Open Trace output file

H48/FILE/- Close Trace output file

H48/FILE/cc..c Change Trace filename

H48/n/s Start/Stop Trace

H48/n/nn/n/c Setup Trace Test Point

Tetra Channel Test:

H49 Display Tetra channel test selection

H49/c Change Sync Mode

H49/n Change Sync Output Frequency

H49/nn/n/nn Select Logical Channel to evaluate

H49/CNTR Display Counters

H49/CLEAR Clear Counter Values

H49/DATA Display data from TR

DC Voltmeter

H60 Display DC Voltmeter

Co-Processor

H61 Display Co-Processor Status

H61/Fhhh0 Display DPRAM

H61/MEM/hhhhh Read CP Memory

H61/PORT/hhhhh Read CP Port

BS<->BSC Message test queue

H63 Display BSC Link Status

Page 3 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

H63/N Display next BSC message

H63/N+ Display next BSC message extended

H63/S Set BSC message test queue to start

H63/C Clear BSC message test queue

H63/s BSC Message suppression

H63/n/hh/hh..hh Send Message to BSC

UDP Message test queue

H64 Display UDP Link Status

H64/N Display next UDP message

H64/N+ Display next UDP message extended

H64/S Set UDP message test queue to start

H64/C Clear UDP message test queue

H64/s UDP Message suppression

H64/hh/hh..hh Send Message to Redundant BS

BS<->TR Message test queue

H65 Display TR Link Status

H65/PS Display PS411 Link Status

H65/N Display next TR message

H65/N+ Display next TR message extended

H65/S Set TR message test queue to start

H65/C Clear TR message test queue

H65/s TR Message suppression

H65/nn/hh/hh..hh Send Message to TR

H65/PS/nn/hh/hh..hh Send Message to PS411

Program Download

H68 Display Program Download Status

H68/TR412 Display TR412 Program Download Status

H68/TR412/cc TR412 Program Download command

BS configuration:

H70 Display command function

H70/SAVE Save BS configuration in file

Common system configuration:

H71 Display Common BS configuration

H71/CNFG/+ Activate BS

H71/CNFG/- Deactivate BS

H71/BSNO/n Change BS Number

H71/RACKNO/n Change Rack Number

Page 4 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

H71/REDBS/s Change Redundant BS Configuration

H71/REDBS/... Change Redundant BS IP Address

H71/BSC/n/s Change BSC Configuration

H71/BSC/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Change BSC IP Address

H71/CMOIP Display CMoIP selection

H71/CMOIP/s Change CMoIP selection

H71/CMOIP/n/... Change CMoIP BSS IP Address

Synchronization configurations

H72 Display BSC412 Sync selection

H72/MASTER/c Change Master Priority

H72/CENTSECOFS/snnnnnnnnnn Change Century Second offset

H72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM Change Century Second offset to DAMM

H72/CENTSECOFS/EADS Change Century Second offset to EADS

H72/GPSRXOFS/snnn.n Change GPS RX offset

H72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM Change GPS RX offset to DAMM

H72/GPSRXOFS/EADS Change GPS RX offset to EADS

H72/IN/n/s Activate/Deactivate BSC412 Sync Input

H72/IN/n/... Setup BSC412 External Sync Input

H72/OUT Display BSC412 Sync Message Output Table

H72/OUT/... Add/Remove BSC412 Sync Message Output

Radio Cell configuration

H73 Display Radio Cell configuration

H73/RXDIV/c Change RX Diversity configuration

H73/RXPREGAIN/n.n Change RX Pre-Gain

H73/RXBAND/... Change RX frequency band

H73/TXBAND/... Change TX frequency band

H73/TXANT/... Change TX antenna alarm settings

Power Supply configuration

H74 Display PS411 Power Supply configuration

H74/AC/s Change PS411 AC Input selection

H74/CHARGE/s Change PS411 Battery Charging selection

H74/CHGVOLT/nn.n Change PS411 Charging Voltage

H74/CHGCOMP/nnn Change PS411 Charging Compensation

Page 5 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Software Versions:

00 Display Welcome Message

00/A Display all software versions

00/C Display compiler options

00/OM Display OM TCP connections

00+ Open GUI Console Window

Gateway Connection:

01 Display Gateways Connection Status

01/L Display Gateway Status List

01/+ Gateway reconnect request

01/C Clear Gateway errors

01/A Auto Gateway select

01/n Forced Gateway select

License Dongle:

04 Display License Dongle Settings

04/I Display License Dongle Info

04/D Display License Dongle Memory in Decimal

04/H Display License Dongle Memory in Hex

Node Status:

10 Display Nodes

10/c Display Node Status

Subscriber Register:

20 Display Subscriber Register

20/RELOAD Subscriber Register reload from Gateway

20/CHECK Subscriber Register consistency check

20/QUE Display Subscriber Register Queues

Profile Register:

21 Display Profile Register Status

21/nnnn Display Profile

21/L/nnnn/snn/nn Display Profile list

21/nnnn/ADD/nnn/cc..c Add/Change Profile

Page 1 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/ASSORG Display Associated Organizations

21/nnnn/ASSORG/s Change use of Associated Organizations

21/nnnn/ASSORG/nnn/s Add/Remove Associated Organization

21/nnnn/SSICALL/s Setup SSI Call Permission

21/nnnn/SSIGROUP/s Use SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group

Calls

21/nnnn/SECMODE/n Setup Security Mode

21/nnnn/SECKSG/nn Setup Key Stream Generator

21/nnnn/SHORTNO/n/nn..n Setup Short Number Format

21/nnnn/DISPNO/nnnnnnn Setup Dispatcher User Number

21/nnnn/PRIORITY/nn Select Call Priority

21/nnnn/PRIORITY/- Select Mobile controlled Call Priority

21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/nn.n Set Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout

21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/- Disable Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout

21/nnnn/GROUPTIMEOUT/nn Set Group Call Inactivity Timeout

21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/nnn Set max. Call Duration

21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/- Set Call Duration limit to infinity

21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/nnn Set max. PTT Duration

21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/- Disable PTT Duration limit

21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/nn Set Late Entry Timer

21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/- Disable Late Entry Timer

21/nnnn/CLASS/M Setup Subscriber Class Mobile controlled

21/nnnn/CLASS/ss... Setup Subscriber Class Network controlled

21/nnnn/SERVRESTR Display SSI Service Restrictions

21/nnnn/SERVRESTR/s Change SSI Service Restriction activation

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/c Display Service Permission flags

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/nn/c Change Mobile SSI Service Permission flag

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/nn/s Change Dial-In SSI Service Permission flag

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/nn/s Change Application SSI Service Permission flag

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/nn/s Change Terminal SSI Service Permission flag

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/cc..c Change all Mobile SSI Service Permission flags

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/ss..s Change all Dial-In SSI Service Permission flags

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/ss..s Change all Application SSI Service Permission

flags

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/ss..s Change all Terminal SSI Service Permission flags

21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR Display Group Call Restriction mode

21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR/s Change Group Call Restriction mode

21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/ADD/s/sAdd/Change Group Permission Table entry

21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/REMRemove Group Permission Table entry

21/nnnn/CELL Display Radio Cell Restrictions

21/nnnn/CELL/s Activate/Deactivate Radio Cell Restrictions

21/nnnn/CELL/nnn/ss..s Setup Radio Cell Permissions

21/nnnn/VGNODE/n/nnn Setup Voice Gateway Node

21/nnnn/PGNODE/n/nnn Setup Packet Data Gateway Node

21/nnnn/POSUSERNO/n/nn..n Setup Position Destination User Number

21/nnnn/DNS/... Setup DNS Server IP Address

21/nnnn/DEL Delete Profile

Subscriber Register SSI:

22 Display SSI Register Status

22/nnnnnnnn Display SSI

22/L/nnnnnnnn/snn/nn Display SSI list

Page 2 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22/nnnnnnnn/REG Display SSI Registration

22/nnnnnnnn/REG/GROUP Display SSI Attached Groups

22/TSI/... Display TSI

22/TSI/.../L Display TSI Chain List

22/TSICHAIN/nnnnnn Display TSI Chain List

22/TSIIXTB Display TSI Indax Table

22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI

22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI

22/nnnnnnnn/DESCR/... Setup SSI Description

22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/... Setup Visiting TSI

22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/- Clear Visiting TSI

22/nnnnnnnn/BLOCK/s Change SSI Blocking

22/nnnnnnnn/PINCODE/cc..c Change PIN Code

22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/... Setup TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/- Clear TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/... Setup SIM ID

22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/- Clear SIM ID

22/nnnnnnnn/AUTHDIS/s Change Mobile Authentication Disable Flag

22/nnnnnnnn/AIEDIS/s Change Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag

22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/R Renew Security Set from Security Key

22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/... Setup Security Set

22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/C Clear Security Set

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPTEXT/cc..cSetup Group Text Line

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL Display Group Include Table

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/s Enable/Disable Group Include Table

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/ADDAdd/Change Group Include Table entry

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/REMRemove Group Include Table entry

22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRF/c Change Call Transfer

22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFNO/cc..cChange Call Transfer Number

22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFTIME/nn Change Call Transfer delay time

22/nnnnnnnn/SUBREG/s Change Subscriber Register change permission

22/nnnnnnnn/DISCREETLIST/s Change Discreet Listening permission

22/nnnnnnnn/AMBIENCELIST/s Change Ambience Listening permission

22/nnnnnnnn/TEMPENDIS/s Change Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable permission

22/nnnnnnnn/PERMDIS/s Change Permanent Mobile Disable permission

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPMAN/s Change Mobile Group Management permission

22/nnnnnnnn/NUMBERMOD/s Change Number Modification Permission

22/nnnnnnnn/EMERGPRI/nn Change Emergency Number Call Priority

22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET Display Target Table

22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/c Display Targets

22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/n/c/c/c/cc..cAdd/Change/Remove Target

22/nnnnnnnn/DEL Delete SSI

Subscriber Register User Number:

23 Display SSI Register Status

23/nnnnnnn Display User Number

23/L/nnnnnnn/snn/nn Display User Number list

Subscriber Register IP Address:

Page 3 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

24 Display SSI Register Status

24/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnn Display IP Address

24/L/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/snn/nnDisplay IP Address list

Security Key Register:

25 Display Command function

25/nnnnnnnn/... Add/Change SSI Key

Organization Register:

26 Display Organization Register Status

26/nnnn Display Organization

26/L/nnn/snn/nn Display Organization list

26/nnn/ADD/cc..c Add/Change Organization

26/nnn/PROFNO/... Change Profile Number range

26/nnn/SSI/... Change SSI range

26/nnn/USERNO/... Change User Number range

26/nnn/IPADDR/... Change IP Address range

26/nnn/PUBLRESTR/s Change Publish Restriction flag

26/nnn/NODERESTR/s Change Node Status Restriction flag

26/nnn/DEL Delete Organization

API Configuration Methods

30/CONFIG/GUI Open GUI Window

API Subscriber Register Methods

30/SUBSCR/GUI Open GUI Window

30/SUBSCR/USERNO/nnnnnnn Get SSI from User Number

30/SUBSCR/IPADDR/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnGet SSI from IP Address

30/SUBSCR/ORG1/nnn Get Organization Record ver. 1

30/SUBSCR/ORG2/nnn Get Organization Record ver. 2

30/SUBSCR/PROF1/nnnn Get Profile Record ver. 1

30/SUBSCR/PROF2/nnnn Get Profile Record ver. 2

30/SUBSCR/SSI1/nnnnnnnn Get SSI Record ver. 1

30/SUBSCR/SSI2/nnnnnnnn Get SSI Record ver. 2

30/SUBSCR/REG1/nnnnnnnn Get Registration Record ver. 1

30/SUBSCR/CMD/... Send Command to Master Subscriber Register

API Node Status Methods

30/NODE/GUI Open GUI Window

Gateway Subscriber Register Command

Page 4 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

51 Display Command function

51/D Display Last Command to Gateway

51/cc..c Send Subscriber Register Command to Gateway

CPU Performance:

66 Display CPU Performance

66/C Clear Peak Hold Times

66/T Display 1msec. timer

66/Q Display Query Performance Counter

API DLL Configuration Commands:

70 Display last file save result

70/SAVE Save DLL API Configuration

General API DLL configuration:

71 Display General API DLL configuration

71/IDPROMPT/+ Prompt User for ID

71/IDPROMPT/- Use ID in configuration

71/USERNO/nnnnnnn Select/change Own User Number ID

71/TSI/nnnn:nnnnn:nnnnnnnn Select/change Own Tetra Subscriber ID

71/PIN/+ Prompt User for Pin Code

71/PIN/- Disable use of Pin Code

71/PIN/nnnnnnnnn Setup/Change PIN Code

71/OMPORT/nnnnn Change OM TCP Port Number

71/OMPIN/nn..n Change OM PIN Code

Gateway configuration:

72 Display Gateways

72/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/... Add/Change Gateway

72/n/- Remove Gateway

Page 5 of 5Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description

Address commands

A Display address

Ann Select address

A++ Forced address select

General commands

00 Display software version

00/A Display all software version numbers

01 Display Local Blocking selection

01+ Local Blocking conditional request

01++ Local Blocking forced request

01- Local Blocking off

01/S Execute software reset

01/H Execute hardware reset

02 Display TR operating mode

02/c Change TR operating mode

03 Display TR Alarm state

03/A Display Internal Alarms

03/B Display BSC Alarms

03/E Display External Alarms

03/C Clear TR alarms

03/L Display alarm latching selection

03/L/s Change alarm latching selection

05 Display Config/Status from BSC

07 Display date/time

07/S Display date/time status

07/T Display DSP TETRA Counters

Transmitter commands

10 Display TX key state

10+ Turn on TX

10- Turn off TX

10/T Display timeslot key

10/T/ssss Change TX timeslot key

10/AUTO Display Auto TX-off mode

10/AUTO/c Change Auto TX-off mode

11 Display TX output and reflected power

12 Display TX combiner TP value

13 Display TX output power selection

Page 1 of 6Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

13/+nn.n Change TX output power

13/MIN Change TX output power to minimum

13/MAX Change TX output power to maximum

13/RED/+nn.n Change Reduced TX output power

13/RED/MIN Change Reduced TX output power to minimum

13/RED/MAX Change Reduced TX output power to maximum

15 Display TX test modulation selection

15/ZERO Select zero modulation

15/CW Select CW modulation

15/CW/PEP Select CW modulation PEP value

15/CW/IQ Display I/Q values for CW modulation

15/CW/cs Select CW modulation

15/CW/IQ/snnnnn/snnnnnSelect CW modulation with I/Q values

15/DSB/c/n Select DSB modulation

15/cSB/n Select SSB modulation

15/PRBS9 Select TETRA PRBS-9 modulation

15/PRBS15 Select TETRA PRBS-15 modulation

15/PH45 Select TETRA +/-45deg. modulation

15/FM/3 Select FM 1kHz +/-3kHz

15/MULTI Select DSB multitone modulation

16 Display TX filter type

16/n Change TX filter type

17 Display TX status

17/IQ Display TX IQ values

18 Display cartesian loop selection

18- Select open cartesian loop

18+ Select closed cartesian loop

18/P TX cartesian loop phase measurement

18/A TX cartesian loop phase/ampl. measurement

18/FREQ TX cartesian loop phase vs frequency measurement

18/PWR TX cartesian loop phase vs. power measurement

18/ADJUST TX cartesian open loop phase adjust

19 Display command function

19/F Select fast TX PLL loop

19/S Select slow TX PLL loop

19/FREQ Display TX PLL voltage vs frequency

19+ Switch TX on and off continuously

19/nnnn Switch TX channel continuously between current and nnnn

Receiver commands

20 Display RX LO status

21 Display RX RSSI

21/c Display RX RSSI

21/NF Display RX Noise Figure

21/FFT/c Display FFT result

21/FFT/c/2 Display 2.25kHz FFT amplitude results

22 Display RX diversity selection

22/A A-forced RX diversity selection

22/B B-forced RX diversity selection

22- Automatic RX diversity selection

23 Display command function

23+ RX antenna measurement command

Page 2 of 6Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

25 Display RX test demodulation mode

25/PM Select PM demodulation

25/FFT Select FFT demodulation

26 Display RX filter type

26/n Change RX filter type

27 Display command function

27/ADC Display RX ADC signals

27/CP/c Display TETRA constellation points

28 Display command function

28/LO Display LO1 injection

28/PLL Display LO1 PLL voltage vs frequency

29 Display command 29 function

29/F Select fast TX FS loop

29/S Select slow TX FS loop

29/nnnn Switch RX channel continuously between current and nnnn

Common commands

30 Display RX+TX channel numbers

30/nnnn Change RX+TX channel number

30/R/nnnn Change RX channel number

30/T/nnnn Change TX channel number

30/R/nnnn.nnnnnn Change RX frequency

30/T/nnnn.nnnnnn Change TX frequency

31 Display BSC signals and PLL status

32 Display RFTL selection

32+ Turn on RFTL high

32/L Turn on RFTL low

32- Turn off RFTL

33 Display PCM highway selections

33/c/s PCM highway loopback control

34 Display CMoIP status

34/C Clear CMoIP Downlink statistics counters

35 Display blower state

35+ Select forced fast Blower

35- Deselect forced fast Blower

43 Display Timeslot status

43/CNTR Display counter values

43/CNTR/C Clear counter values

43/CONST/n/c Display constellation points

48 Display Message Trace

49 Display Tetra channel test selection

49/CHTST/nn/n Activate Tetra channel test

49- Stop Tetra channel test

Test commands

60 Display DC test points

60/A Display all DC test points

60/nn Display specific DC test point

60/T Display temperature

Page 3 of 6Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

60/REF Display DC voltmeter reference voltage

61 Display DSP state

61/CNTR Display DSP counters

61/CNTR/C Clear DSP counters

61- Stop DSP execution

61+ Restart DSP

61/+ Release DSP reset

61/B Boot DSP without execution

61/R Start DSP program run

61/hhhhhhhh Display DSP memory word

61/hhhhhhh0/B Display DSP memory byte-wise

61/hhhhhhh0/W Display DSP memory word-wise

61/hhhhhhh0/D Display DSP memory doublewordwise

61/REG/c Display DSP interface registers

61/hhhhhhhh/hhhhhhhh Change DSP memory

61/HPIC DSP HPIC read-back

61/HPIA/hhhhhhhh DSP HPIA write/read test

65 Display command function

65/N Display next HDLC message

65/C Clear HDLC test queue

65/S Set HDLC test queue to start

65/s Message display suppress control

65/ADDR Display HDLC queue addresses

65/OWN Display OWN bits

65/BUF Display current HDLC descriptors

65/BUF/nnn Display HDLC descriptors

65/hhhhhhhh..hh Send HDLC message to BSC

65/TST Display HDLC test variables

65/TST/c Start/stop sending HDLC test messages

65/TST/C Clear HDLC test error counters

65/TST/nn/nnn/nn Change HDLC test message output parameters

66 Display CPU load

66/C Clear max-counter values

66/LOAD Display random load value

66/LOAD/nnnn Change random load value

67/LEDS Display LED state

67/ADDRPORT Display address port

68 Display command

68/DOWNLOAD Request program download from BSC

68/CHKSUM Display flash checksum

69 Display boot program version number

69/hhhh0 Display memory area

69/D/hhh0 Display data segment area

69/ADDR Display memory addresses

69/IO/hhhh Display I/O Port

System configuration

70 Display system configuration status

70/SAVE Save system configuration in flash

70/CNFG Return system configuration

71 Display TX settings

71/TCTP/n.nnn Change TX Combiner TP alarm threshold

Page 4 of 6Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

72 Display RX settings

72/PREGAIN/n.n Change RX pre-gain setting

Factory configuration

90 Display factory configuration status

90/FACTORYUNLOCK Select factory configuration unlock

90- Deselect factory configuration unlock

90/SAVE Save factory configuration in flash

90/CNFG Return factory configuration

TX factory configuration

91 Display TX factory configuration

91/IZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop I-zero

91/QZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop Q-zero

91/LOOPGAIN/nnn Change Loop Gain

91/QAMPL/n.nnnn Change TX Q-amplitude balance

91/QPHASE/sn.nnnn Change TX Q-phase quadrature

91/PH0/nnn Select Cartesian Loop channel 0 phase adjust value

91/PHS/snnn Change Cartesian Loop channel phase step value

91/MAXPWR/nnn.nn Change max. TX power setting

91/PWR/n.nnn Change TX power setting

91/PMOUT/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter output setting

91/PMREFL/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter reflected setting

91/ZERO Display TX carrier zero adjust table

91/ZERO/nnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table channel step

91/ZERO/n/snnnn/snnnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table value

91/ZERO/n/snnnn/snnnn/QSetup TX carrier zero adjust table value (quiet)

Common factory configuration

93 Display common factory settings

93/CHSTEP/nn.nnn Change channel step size

93/CHRX0/nnnnnn Change RX channel zero

93/CHTX0/nnnnnn Change TX channel zero

93/CHIFOFS/snnnn Change 1st LO IF channel offset

93/CHTCOFS/snnnn Change TC channel offset

93/CHMIN/nnnn Change lowest used channel number

93/CHMAX/nnnn Change highest used channel number

Test circuit configuration

96 Display Test circuit settings

96/DCVM/n.nnn Change DC Voltmeter calibration constant

96/THERM/snn.n Change Thermometer calibration offset

Page 5 of 6Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Hardware identity

98 Display hardware ID

98/TYPE Display type number

98/ITEM Display item number

98/SER Display serial number

98/VER Display version number

98/REV Display revision number

98/ITEM/cc..c Change item number

98/SER/cc..c Change serial number

98/VER/n.nn Change version number

98/REV/n Change revision number

Page 6 of 6Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description:

Software Version:

00 Display software version

00/A Display all software version numbers

00/OM Display OM Connection status

00/BSC Display BSC Connection status

Operator Blocking:

01 Display Operator Blocking selection

01+ Operator Blocking request

01- Operator Blocking off

01/DEBUG Display Debug Commands Enable selection

01/DEBUG/+ Enable Debug Commands

01/DEBUG/- Disable Debug Commands

Operating Mode:

02 Display TR operating mode

02/c Change TR operating mode

Alarms:

03 Display Alarm State

03/A Display Alarm Flags

03/E Display BSC External Alarms

03/C Clear Alarms

03/LED Display LED State

BSC:

05 Display BSC status/configuration

MAC Address:

06 Display Network settings

06/MAC Display MAC Address

06/SYNC Synchronize Flash and Registry Settings

Page 1 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

06/NAME/cc.c Setup Host Name

06/DHCP/s Setup DHCP

06/IPADDR/... Setup IP Address

06/IPMASK/... Setup IP Mask

06/IPGW/... Setup IP Default Gateway

06/MAC/hh-hh-hh Setup MAC Address

06/10MBIT/s Change 10MBit/s Forced Flag

Date/Time:

07 Display Current Local Date/Time

07/S Display Date/Time status

07/T Display DSP TETRA Counters

TX Key:

10 Display TX key state

10+ Turn on TX

10- Turn off TX

10/T Display timeslot key

10/T/ssss Change TX timeslot key

10/AUTO Display Auto TX-off mode

10/AUTO/c Change Auto TX-off mode

TX Output Power:

11 Display TX output and reflected power

TX Current/Power consumption:

12 Display TX Current/Power consumption

12/P Display PA Power

TX Output Power selection:

13 Display TX output power selection

13/+nn.n Change TX Normal Output Power setting

13/MIN Set TX Normal Output Power to Minimum

13/MAX Set TX Normal Output Power to Maximum

13/RED/+nn.n Change Reduced TX Output Power setting

13/RED/MIN Set TX Reduced Output Power to Minimum

13/RED/MAX Set TX Reduced Output Power to Maximum

TX PA DC Bias:

14 Display TX Bias

Page 2 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

14+ Select TX Bias Forced On

14- Select TX Bias Off (DSP Controlled)

TX modulation:

15 Display TX test modulation selection

15/ZERO Select zero modulation

15/CW Select CW modulation

15/CW/PEP Select CW modulation PEP value

15/CW/cs Select CW modulation

15/CW/IQ/snnnnn/snnnnnSelect CW modulation with I/Q values

15/PRBS9 Select TETRA PRBS-9 modulation

15/PRBS15 Select TETRA PRBS-15 modulation

15/DSB/c/n Select DSB modulation

15/cSB/n Select SSB modulation

15/FM/3 Select FM 1kHz +/-3kHz

15/MULTI Select DSB multitone modulation

15/PH45 Select TETRA +/-45deg. modulation

TX modulation filter:

16 Display TX filter type

16/n Change TX filter type

TX status:

17 Display TX status

TX Cartesial Loop:

18 Display TX cartesian loop selections

18- Select open cartesian loop

18+ Select closed cartesian loop

18/P TX cartesian loop phase measurement

18/A TX cartesian loop phase/ampl. measurement

18/FREQ TX cartesian loop phase vs frequency measurement

18/PWR TX cartesian loop phase vs. power measurement

18/LIN TX linearity measurement

18/ADJ TX cartesian open loop phase adjust

TX utility commands:

19 Display command function

19/F Display TX PLL voltage vs frequency

19+ Switch TX on and off

19/nnnn Switch TX channel to nnnn and back again

Page 3 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX Local Oscillators:

20 Display RX LO status

RX RSSI:

21 Display RX RSSI

21/c Display RX RSSI

21/NF Display RX Noise Figure

21/FFT Display FFT result

21/FFT/A Display FFT Adjust results

21/FREQ Display RX Signal Frequency Offset

RX Diversity:

22 Display RX diversity selection

22/A A-forced RX diversity selection

22/B B-forced RX diversity selection

22- Automatic RX diversity selection

RX Antenna test:

23 Display command function

23+ RX antenna measurement command

RX-B Input:

24 Display RX-B Input Selection

24+ Select RX-B input Cascaded

24- Deselect RX-B input Cascaded

RX demodulation mode:

25 Display RX test demodulation mode

25/PM Select PM demodulation

25/FFT/A Select RX-A FFT demodulation

25/FFT/B Select RX-B FFT demodulation

25/FREQ/A Select RX-A Frequency Measurement

25/FREQ/B Select RX-B Frequency Measurement

RX IF filter:

26 Display RX filter selection

Page 4 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

26/n Change RX filter type

RX Signal Display:

27 Display command function

27/CP/c Display TETRA Constellation Points

27/ADC Display ADC peak-peak input levels

RX adjust commands:

28 Display command function

28/LO Display LO1 injection

28/BPF Display RSSI vs. Frequency

RX utility commands:

29 Display command function

29/F Display RX PLL voltage vs frequency

29/nnnn Switch RX to channel nnnn and back again

Channel/Frequency:

30 Display RX+TX channel numbers and frequencies

30/F Display Hardware Frequency Range

30/nnnn Change RX+TX channel number

30/R/nnnn Change RX channel number

30/T/nnnn Change TX channel number

30/R/nnn.nnnnnn Change RX frequency

30/T/nnn.nnnnnn Change TX frequency

Synchronization

31 Display Sync status

31/IN Display Sync Input status

31/IN/c Change Sync Input selection

31/SET Set OCXO Free Run adjust value to current DAC value

31/SET/nn.nnn Set OCXO Free Run value

31/SAVE Save OCXO Free Run adjust value in Flash

31/PPS Display 1 PPS inputs

31/HIST Display OCXO Sync history

31/STEP/nn.nnn Simulate a PLL Frequency Step

RFTL:

32 Display RFTL selection

32+ Turn on RFTL Forward

Page 5 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

32/B Turn on RFTL Backward

32- Turn off RFTL

32/nnn Select RFTL Forward Level

32/ATT Display RFTL Attenuator value

Duplex Filter:

33 Display Duplex Filter Selection

33+ Select Duplex Filter

33- Deselect Duplex Filter

CMoIP:

34 Display all CMoIP Connections

34/n Display one CMoIP Connection

34/n/... CMoIP Multicast Connect

34/n/REL CMoIP Multicast Release

34/C Clear CMoIP Downlink Statistics Couters

34/Q Display CMoIP DSP queues

MAC

43 Display Command Function

43/CONST/n/c Display Constellation Points

43/LMAC Display LMAC Message Statistics

43/LMAC/C Clear LMAC Message Counter

BSC Message Count:

47 Display BSC message count

47/C Clear BSC message count

Message Trace:

48 Display message trace

48+ Start Trace of all TS to UDP

48- Stop Trace of all TS to UDP

48/UDP/+ Activate trace output to UDP

48/UDP/- Stop trace output to UDP

48/UDP/nnn... Change trace UDP address+port

48/FILE/+ Open trace output file

48/FILE/- Close trace output file

48/FILE/cc..c Change trace filename

48/n/c Start/Stop Timeslot Trace

48/C Clear Trace Counters

Page 6 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Tetra Channel Test:

49 Display Tetra channel test selection

49/nn/n Activate Tetra channel test

49- Stop Tetra channel test

49/c Change Sync Mode

49/CNTR Display Counters

49/CLEAR Clear Counter Values

49/DATA Display Received Data

DC Voltmeter:

60 Display DC test points

60/nn Display one DC test point

60/T Display temperature

60/ADC Display voltmeter ADC values

DSP:

61 Display DSP state

61- Stop DSP execution

61+ Restart DSP

61/B Select DSP Boot State

61/S Select DSP Setup State

61/R Start DSP program run

61/hhhhhhhh Display DSP memory word

61/hhhhhhh0/1 Display DSP memory 8-bit wise

61/hhhhhhh0/2 Display DSP memory 16-bit wise

61/hhhhhhh0/4 Display DSP memory 32-bit wise

61/hhhhhhhh/hhhhhhhh Change DSP memory

61/REG/nn Display DSP interface registers

61/REG/nn/nn Display DSP interface registers

61/HPIA/hhhhhhhh DSP HPIA write/read test

61/HPIC Display HPI Control Register

CPLD:

62 Display CPLD version

Internal GPS:

63 Display Internal GPS Status

63/VER Display GPS Module Version

63/N Display next Internal GPS message

63/SETUP Setup GPS RX Module

Page 7 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

63/SEND/cc..c Send Command to GPS RX Module

63/RESET/s GPS RX Module Reset

Message Test Queue:

65 Display BSC Link Connection status

65/N Display next message

65/C Clear test queue

65/S Set test queue to start

65/s Message display suppress control

65/c/hh/hh..hh Send message

Host Performance:

66 Display Host CPU task load

66/C Clear Host CPU Load Peak Hold

66/T Display 1msec. Timer

66/Q Display QPC Counter

Real Time Clock:

68 Display RTC NVRAM

68/hh/hh Change RTC NVRAM

Host Memory:

69 Display command function

69/hhhhhhhh Display Host memory word

69/hhhhhhh0/1 Display Host memory 8-bit wise

69/hhhhhhh0/2 Display Host memory 16-bit wise

69/hhhhhhh0/4 Display Host memory 32-bit wise

69/hhhhhhhh/hhhhhhhh Change Host memory

System configuration:

70 Display command function

70/SAVE Save System Configuration

Common system configuration:

71 Display Common System configuration

71/ID/cc..c Change TR ID String

71/TRADDR/nn Change TR Address

71/MSGPORT/nnnnn Change Local Message Port Number

71/BSC/n/s Change BSC Configuration

71/BSC/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnChange BSC IP Address

Page 8 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

71/BSC/n/s Change BSC Connection Protocol

71/BSC/n/nnnnn Change BSC Remote Port Number

71/CMOIP/BSS/s Change CMoIP to BSS selection

71/CMOIP/BSS/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnChange CMoIP BSS IP Address

71/TXREFLWAR/c Change TX Reflected Alarm selection

Synchronization configurations

72 Display Sync selection

72/MASTER/c Change Master Priority

72/CENTSECOFS/snnnnnnnnnnChange Century Second offset

72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM Change Century Second offset to DAMM

72/CENTSECOFS/EADS Change Century Second offset to EADS

72/GPSRXOFS/snnn.n Change GPS RX offset

72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM Change GPS RX offset to DAMM

72/GPSRXOFS/EADS Change GPS RX offset to EADS

72/IN/n/s Activate/Deactivate Sync Input

72/IN/n/... Setup External Sync Input

72/OUT Display Sync Message Output Table

72/OUT/... Add/Remove Sync Message Output

Factory configuration:

90 Display factory lock status

90/FACTORYUNLOCK Select factory configuration unlock

90- Deselect factory configuration unlock

90/CNFG Return current Factory Configuration

90/FLASH Return Factory Configuration in Flash

90/SAVE Save Factory Configuration in Flash

90/CLEAR Clear Flash Factory Configuration

TX factory configuration:

91 Display TX factory configuration

91/PWRADJ/n.nnn Change TX Output Power

91/BIASDR/nnn Change TX Driver Bias

91/BIASPA/nnn Change TX PA Bias

91/IZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop I-zero

91/QZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop Q-zero

91/LOOPGAIN/nnn Change Loop Gain

91/QAMPL/n.nnnn Change TX Q-amplitude balance

91/QPHASE/sn.nnnn Change TX Q-phase quadrature

91/PH0/nnn Select Cartesian Loop channel 0 phase adjust value

91/PHSTEP/snnn Change Cartesian Loop channel phase step value

91/ZERO Display TX carrier zero adjust table

91/ZERO/nnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table channel step

91/ZERO/n/snnnn/snnnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table value

91/PMOUT/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter output setting

91/PMREFL/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter reflected setting

Page 9 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Common factory configuration:

93 Display common factory settings

93/CHIFOFS/snnnn Change 1st LO IF channel offset

93/CHRX0/nnnnnn Change RX channel zero

93/CHTX0/nnnnnn Change TX channel zero

93/CHTRMIN/nnnn Change lowest Transceiver channel number

93/CHTRMAX/nnnn Change highest Transceiver channel number

93/CHDFMIN/nnnn Change lowest Duplex Filter channel number

93/CHDFMAX/nnnn Change highest Duplex Filter channel number

93/DFTXLOSS/n.n Duplex Filter TX Path Loss

93/DFRXALOSS/n.n Duplex Filter RX-A Path Loss

93/DFRXBLOSS/n.n Duplex Filter RX-B Path Loss

93/SYNCEXT2/c Sync External 2 input selection

93/GPSRX/c GPS RX Type selection

Hardware identity:

98 Display Hardware Identity

98/ITEM/cc..c Change item number

98/SER/cc..c Change serial number

98/VER/cc..c Change version number

98/REV/cc..c Change revisions

98/DFSER/cc..c Change Duplex Filter Serial No.

TR421 Control Commands

99 Display command function

99/STOP Stop TR421 service

99/RESTART Restart TR421 service

99/HWRESET Make BS421 Hardware Reset

Page 10 of 10Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Functional Description

Address commands

A Display address

Anc Select address

A++ Forced address select

General commands

00 Display software version number

02 Display command function

02+ Execute software reset

02++ Execute hardware reset

03 Display alarm status

03/C Alarm reset

Output commands

10 Display output values

11 Display 14V output selection

11- Turn off 14V output

11+ Turn on 14V output

12 Display 26V output selection

12- Turn off 26V output

12+ Turn on 26V output

Rectifier commands

20 Display Rectifier status

21 Display Rectifier selection

21- Turn off Rectifier

21+ Turn on Rectifier

22 Display Rectifier manual voltage control selection

22+ Select Rectifer manual voltage control

22- Deselect Rectifier manual voltage control

23 Display Rectifier output voltage selection

23/nn.n Change Rectifier output voltage

Battery charging commands

Page 1 of 2Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

30 Display battery status

Test commands

60 Display temperature

63 Display timer

65 Display command function

65/N Display next message

65/C Clear test queue

65/hhhh..hh Send message to BSC

65/L Enable loop-back reception

67 Display Board Address

69 Display last selected memory address

69/hhhh Display memory address hhhh

System settings

70 Display system settings

71 Display AC input selection

71s Change AC input selection

71/EE++++ Save AC input selection in EEPROM

72 Display Battery charging selection

72s Change Battery charging selection

72/EE++++ Save Battery charging selection in EEPROM

73 Display Battery charging voltage selection

73/nn.n Select Battery charging voltage

73/EE++++ Save Battery charging voltage in EEPROM

74 Display Battery charging temperature compensation

74/-nnn Select Battery charging temperature compensation

74/EE++++ Save Battery charging temperature compensation in EEPROM

Factory settings

90 Display factory unlock selection

90/UNLOCK Select factory unlock

90- Deselect factory unlock

91 Display PS Rectifier selection

91+ Select Rectifier included

91- Select No Rectifier included

95 Display Item number

95/ccc..c Change Item number

96 Display Type number

96/ccc..c Change Type number

97 Display Serial number

97/nnnnnnnn Change serial number

98 Display Version number

98/cc..c Change Version number

99 Display Revision number

99/cc..c Change Revision number

Page 2 of 2Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Functional Description

General commands

00 Display software version number

02 Display command function

02+ Execute hardware reset

03 Display alarm flags

PS commands

10 Display PS Status

11 Display TR1/TR3 Power-Off Selection

11+ Turn On TR1/TR3 Power

11- Turn Off TR1/TR3 Power

12 Display TR2/TR4 Power-Off Selection

12+ Turn On TR2/TR4 Power

12- Turn Off TR2/TR4 Power

Rectifier commands

20 Display Rectifier status

21 Display Rectifier Off selection

21- Turn Off Rectifier

21+ Turn On Rectifier

22 Display Rectifier Manual Voltage Control selection

22+ Select Rectifer Manual Voltage Control

22- Deselect Rectifier Manual Voltage Control

23 Display Rectifier Output Voltage selection

23/nn.n Change Rectifier Output Voltage

24 Display Battery Super Charge Status

24/n.n/nnn Start Battery Super Charge

24- Stop Battery Super Charge

Test commands

60 Display ADC Result

67 Display Input Port

68 Display command function

68/BOOT Switch to Boot Mode

69 Display last selected memory address

69/hhhh Display memory address hhhh

Page 1 of 2Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

System Configuration

70 Display System Configuration

70/SAVE Save System Configuration in Flash

71 Display AC input selection

71s Change AC input selection

72 Display Battery charging selection

72s Change Battery charging selection

73 Display Battery charging voltage selection

73/nn.n Select Battery charging voltage

74 Display Battery charging temperature compensation

74/-nnn Select Battery charging temperature compensation

Factory Configuration

90 Display Factory Configuration

90/D Display factory unlock selection

90/UNLOCK Select factory unlock

90- Deselect factory unlock

90/SAVE Save Factory Configuration in Flash

91 Display Rectifier selection

91+ Select Rectifier included

91- Select No Rectifier included

95 Display Item Number

95/ccc..c Change Item Number

96 Display Type Number

96/ccc..c Change Type Number

97 Display Serial Number

97/nnnnnnnn Change Serial Number

98 Display Version Number

98/cc..c Change Version Number

99 Display Revision Number

99/cc..c Change Revision Number

Page 2 of 2Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Functional Description

Address commands

A Display address

Anc Select address

General commands

00 Display software version number

01 Display blocking state

01+ Make blocking

01- Make deblocking

02 Display command function

02+ Execute software reset

02++ Execute hardware reset

Combiner control commands

10 Display frequencies

10/n Display frequency

10/n/+ Step up one channel

10/n/- Step down one channel

10/n/nnnn Change channel no.

10/n/E Go to end stop

10/n/EE++++ Save channel no. in EEPROM

11 Display operating mode

11- Select manual operating mode

11+ Select automatic operating mode

11/EE++++ Save operating mode in EEPROM

12 Display all test points

12/n Display test point

13 Display fine adjustment settings

13/n Display fine adjustment setting

13/n/+ Increment fine adjustment setting

13/n/- Decrement fine adjustment setting

13/n/snn Change fine adjustment setting

13/n/EE++++ Save fine adjustment setting in EEPROM

Motor control commands

20 Display motor positions

20/n Display motor position

Page 1 of 2Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

20/n/+ Step up motor position

20/n/- Step down motor position

20/n/nnnn Change motor position

20/n/++ Forced step up motor position

20/n/E Init to end stop

21 Display command function

21/n/C Motor continuous up/down

Test commands

60 Display temperature

67 Display TR serial input port levels

68 Display input port

69 Display last selected memory address

69/hhhh Display memory address hhhh

Calibration

80 Display calibration unlock selection

80/UNLOCK Unlock for calibration

81 Display start frequency

81/nnnn Change start frequency

82 Display channel separation

82/nn Change channel separation

83 Display calibration channel spacing

83/nn Change calibration channel spacing

84 Display end stop position

84/nnnn Change end stop position

85 Display command function

85/n Display calibration values

85/n/nn Display calibration value

85/n/nn/SET Set calibration point to current position

85/n/nn/nnnn Change calibration point value

Factory settings

90 Display BS type selection

90/c Change BS type selection

91 Display Thermometer setting

91/snn Change Thermometer setting

95 Display Item number

95/ccc..c Change Item number

96 Display Type number

96/ccc..c Change Type number

97 Display Serial number

97/nnnnnn Change 6-digit serial number

97/nnnnnnnn Change 8-digit serial number

98 Display Version number

98/cc..c Change Version number

99 Display Revision number

Page 2 of 2Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

99/cc..c Change Revision number

Page 3 of 2Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

OM program help

OM

TetraOM command line parameters

Commands

C/... Continuous command

R/... Repeat command

!WAIT(hh:mm) Wait until a specific time

!DELAY(delay) Insert a delay, in steps of 1/10 of a second

!KEY Wait for keypress.

!ECHO(comments) Comments to be displayed with highlighted

text.

Logging

!LOG Show logging settings

!LOG(c,r,a,filename) Open or create logfile.

!LOG(CREATE,filename) Create and open logfile. Empty if already

exists.

!LOG(OPEN,filename) Open logfile. Append if exists.

!LOG(CLOSE) Close logfile

!LOG(SET,t,t,s,s,d,d) Enable/disable command/response logging

Options

!OPT Show options settings

!OPT(TIMEOUT,seconds) Set timeout in seconds

!OPT(LINEDELAY,ms) Set linedelay in milliseconds

!OPT(ECHO,s,s,d,d) Enable/disable echoing in terminal

!OPT(TERMWIN,xxx,yyy) Set terminal window size

!OPT(TERMFONTSIZE,s) Set terminal font size

Connections

!CONN Show number of items in connection list

!CONN(D,co,ba,a,n) Direct

!CONN(M,co,ba,a,n) Direct modem

!CONN(U,co,ba,ph,da,dti,rw,ati,a,n)Dialup modem

!CONN(N,ip,a,n) Network

Page 1 of 2Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Connect

!CONNECT(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) Connects to a new BSC

Disconnect

!DISCONNECT Disconnects from the current BSC

Fileview settings

!FILEVIEW Show number of items in the file view list

!FILEVIEW(name,teof,file) Insert item in file view list

Editor commands

SET command

:SET(var,value) Set variable value

For - Next Loops

:FOR(var,start,end) Define the start of a FOR/NEXT loop.

:FOR(var,start,end,stepsize) Define the start of a FOR/NEXT loop.

:NEXT(var) Repeat or end last defined FOR loop

Labels, jumps, conditional jumps.

:LABEL(labelname) Set destination of jumps.

:GOTO(labelname) Continue processing at a label.

:IFNORESP(nextlabel) Jump, if no response on communication-port.

:IFTIMEOUT(nextlabel) Jump, if general fault, on communication-port.

:IFINVALID(nextlabel) Jump, if reponse contained 'INVALID'

:IFEOD(nextlabel) Jump, if end of data-marker was read.

Special commands

:TIMEOUT(time) Setup timeout time on RS232 port

:EXECUTE(filename) Send file to port.

:INCLUDE(filename) Include file into command-list.

:SEND(....) Send command containing variables.

<cmd> Send command

Page 2 of 2Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description

Page 1 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Address selection

A ADDRESS SELECTION

A Display Address selection

Displays selected address for nn commands

A

AP Select PS421 Address

Deselected again by selecting any other nn command address

NB: Only available on BSC421 if if PS421 is configured!

AP

Command description:

Page 2 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

General commands

M00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

M00 Display Welcome Message

M00

M00/A Display all software versions numbers

M00/A

M00/C Display compiler options

M00/C

M00/OM Display OM TCP Connection status

M00/OM

Command description:

M01 DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

M01 Display Description

M01

Command description:

Page 3 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Alarms

M03 ALARMS

M03 Display Alarm Ports

NB: Command not available on PC Hardware

M03

M03/OUT/n Manual Alarm Level Output Control

Activates Manual Alarm Control of Alarm Output 1 + 2

Level Out2 Out1

----- ---- ----

L0: Off Off

L1: Off On

L2: On Off

L3: On On

Individual L1, L2 and L3 Alarms can be achieved by wiring of two external

relays:

K1A K1B K2A K2B

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

ÀÅ ÅÅ ÅÙ

À Å Å ÅÙ

Å Ù À ¿

À Å Å ¿

À Å Å ¿

Ù

L1 L2 L3

NB: Remember to disable Manual Control again with M03/OUT/- command!

Alarm Level (0..3)

M03/OUT/.

M03/OUT/- Stop Manual Alarm Output Control

M03/OUT/-

M03/LED Display LEDs

NB: Command not available on PC Hardware

M03/LED

Command description:

Page 4 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Network Settings

M06 DISPLAY NETWORK PARAMETERS

M06 Display Network parameters

M06

Command description:

Page 5 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Date/Time

M07 DISPLAY DATE AND TIME

M07 Display date and time

M07

M07/S Display date/time status

M07/S

Command description:

Page 6 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

PS421 Status

M16 PS421 STATUS

M16 Display PS421 Status

Displays status of the local connected PS421

NB: Only available on BSC421 if if PS421 is configured!

M16

M16/AL Display PS421 Alarm Flags

Displays Alarm Flags for the local connected PS421

NB: Only available on BSC421 if if PS421 is configured!

M16/AL

Command description:

Page 7 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Debug Queue/File

M46 DEBUG QUEUE/FILE

M46 Display Debug Queue/File status

M46

M46/C Clear Debug Queue

M46/C

M46/S Save Debug Queue in File

Debug is save in ...\Data\Debug.txt

M46/S

Command description:

Page 8 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

GUI OM Command

M50 GUI OM COMMAND

M50 Display Last GUI OM Command/Response

To be used for Software development only

M50

M50/cc..c Execute GUI OM Command

Writes the OM Command to the GUI Shared Memory.

Multicommands separated with the '|' character are supported.

As '|' however can not been sent as it will be interpreted of the OM Program,

the character '^' shall be used instead. The OM F50 command interpreter will

modify

'^' to '|' before it is written.

To be used for Software development only

OM Command

M50/.........................................................................

Command description:

Page 9 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

CPLD

M62 CPLD

M62 Display CPLD Version

M62

M62/HWSIG Display CPLD Hardware Signature

M62/HWSIG

M62/RAM Read CPLD Test RAM

M62/RAM

M62/RAM/hhhh Write/Read CPLD Test RAM

Value to write (0000..hhhh hex)

M62/RAM/....

M62/INPORT Display Input Port

M62/INPORT

M62/ALPORT Display Alarm Port

M62/ALPORT

Command description:

Page 10 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

CPU load

M66 CPU LOAD COMMAND

M66 Display CPU load

M66

M66/C Clear CPU Load Peak Hold

M66/C

M66/T Display 1msec. Timer

M66/T

M66/Q Display QPC Timer

M66/Q

Command description:

Page 11 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

PS421 Program Download

M68 PS421 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

M68 Display Program Download Status

M68

M68/PS421 Display PS421 Program Download Status

NB: Command only available with BSC421 Hardware

M68/PS421

M68/PS421/+ Start PS421 Program Download

1) Reads ...\PGM\PS421\PS421.HEX file from disk

2) Sends 68/BOOT command to PS421 to restart in boot mode

3) Dowloads Hex Records to PS421

4) Restarts PS421 again

NB: Boot Part of PS421 software is NOT updated.

Boot version can be displayed with the PS421 '68' command.

NB: Command only available with BSC421 Hardware

M68/PS421/+

Command description:

Page 12 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

I/O Memory

M69 I/O MEMORY

M69 Display I/O Memory Configuration

M69

M69/hhhh/1 Read I/O Memory Byte

Address Offset (0000..hhhh hex)

M69/..../1

M69/hhhh/2 Read I/O Memory 16-bit word

Address Offset (0000..hhhh hex)

M69/..../2

M69/hhhh/hh Write I/O Memory Byte

Address Offset (0000..hhhh hex)

Value to write (00..FF hex)

M69/..../..

M69/hhhh/hhhh Write I/O Memory 16-bit word

Address Offset (0000..hhhh hex)

Value to write (0000..FFFF hex)

M69/..../....

Command description:

Page 13 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

System configuration

M70 MAIN CONFIGURATION

M70 Display last File Save result

M70

M70/SAVE Save Main Configuration

Note that Main Configuration changes are saved automatically

M70/SAVE

Command description:

Page 14 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Main configurations

M71 Display Main Configuration

M71

M71/DESCR/cc..c Change description

Desctiption

M71/DESCR/...............................

M71/IPADDR/ccc/... Change IP address

Note, that it shall match the IP Address for an Ethernet adapter.

LAN: LAN Local Address

WAN: WAN Local Address

IP address (000..255 in each field)

M71/IPADDR/.../...............

M71/POS/GPS/s Change Position update from GPS

Position update from GPS

+: Allow GPS to update position (default)

-: GPS not allowed to change position

M71/POS/GPS/.

M71/POS/... Change Position

Default position when no GPS signal is received.

Shall be setup only, when no GPS antenna is attached to either a connected

BS421

or the BSC412.

Parameter is overwritten, when a valid GPS position is received.

Latitude degree (00..89)

Latitude minutes (00..59)

Latitude seconds (00.00..59.99)

Latitude N/S (N or S)

Longitude degree (000..179)

Longitude minutes (00..59)

Longitude seconds (00.00..59.99)

Longitude E/W (E or W)

M71/POS/..:..:....../...:..:......

M71/GPSTIME/s Change Date/Time update from GPS

NB: Command only available with external BSS

GPS Date/Time update

+: Windows Date/Time updated from GPS

-: Windows Date/Time not updated from GPS

M71/GPSTIME/.

Page 15 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

PS421 configuration

M76 Display PS421 Configuration

NB: Only available for BSC421!

M76

M76/PS421 Setup PS421 configuration

NB: Only available for BSC421!

M76/PS421

M76/REMOVE Remove PS configuration

NB: Only available for BSC421!

M76/REMOVE

M76/PSADDR/nn Change PS421 Address

NB: Only available for BSC421!

PS421 Address (11..47)

M76/PSADDR/..

M76/BSCn/... Change BSC IP address

IP Addresses of the BSC for PS421 status forwarding

1: BSC1

2: BSC2

IP address (000..255 in each field)

M76/BSC./...............

Page 16 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Factory configuration commands

M90 Display Factory Configuration status

M90

M90/FACTORYUNLOCK Select Factory Configuration unlock

UNLOCK

M90/FACTORY......

M90- Deselect Factory Configuration unlock

M90-

M90/SAVE Save Factory Configuration

Note, that all Factory Configuration changes

are saved automatically

M90/SAVE

Page 17 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Hardware Versions

M91 HARDWARE VERSIONS

M91 Display Hardware Versions

M91

M91/ITEM/cc..c Change item number

Item number

M91/ITEM/...............

M91/SER/cc..c Change serial number

Serial number

M91/SER/........

M91/VER/n.nn Change version number

Version number

M91/VER/....

M91/REV/n Change revision number

Revision number (00..99)

M91/REV/..

Command description:

Page 18 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSC412 Factory Configuration

M92 BSC412 FACTORY CONFIGURATION

M92 Display BSC412 Factory Configuration

M92

M92/GPSRX/c Change GPS RX type

GPS RX Type

3: iTrax03

6: IT600

M92/GPSRX/.

Command description:

Page 19 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Restart Commands

M99 RESTART COMMANDS

M99 Display command function

M99

M99/STOP Stop BSC Service

Makes a normal shutdown of the service

NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!

NB: This requires a Remote Desktop connection to get the

BSC Service restarted!

M99/STOP

M99/RESTART Restart BSC service

Makes a restart of the BSC Service

1) Copy "Share" content from "Active"

2) Stop BSC Service

3) Copy BSC.exe to BSC..exe

4) Start BSC Service

NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!

M99/RESTART

M99/UPDATE/RESTART Restart BSC service with Update

Updates and Restarts BSC Service

1) Update "Active" with content of "Update"

2) Copy "Share" content from "Active"

3) Stop BSC Service

4) Copy BSC.exe to BSC..exe

5) Start BSC Service

NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!

M99/UPDATE/RESTART

M99/BACKUP/UPDATE/RESTART Restart BSC service with Backup and Update

Backup, Updates and Restarts BSC Service

1) Backup "Active" to "Backup"

2) Update "Active" with content of "Update"

3) Copy "Share" content from "Active"

4) Stop BSC Service

5) Copy BSC.exe to BSC..exe

6) Start BSC Service

NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!

M99/BACKUP/UPDATE/RESTART

Page 20 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

M99/RESTORE/RESTART Restart BSC service with Restore

Restores and Restarts BSC Service

1) Restores "Backup" to "Active"

2) Copy "Share" content from "Active"

3) Stop BSC Service

4) Copy BSC.exe to BSC..exe

5) Start BSC Service

NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!

M99/RESTORE/RESTART

Command description:

Page 21 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description

BSC421 LED description

LED's on top of BSC421 cover:

LED Color Marking Indication

--- ------ ----------- ------------------------------

D1 Yellow BSC POWER +5V BSC421 present

D2 Green BSC ACTIVE BSC is active (not standby)

D3 Red BSC NETWORK Network Alarm (fall-back mode)

D4 Red BSC BSS BSS Software Alarm

D5 Red BSC BSC BSC Software Alarm

D6 Red BSC ALARM BSC421 Alarm

D7 Yellow PS LINK PS421 Communication Link OK

D8 Green PS MAINS PS421 Mains Voltage OK

D9 Green PS CHARGE Battery Charge

D10 Red PS DISCH. Battery Discharge

D11 Red PS ALARM PS421 Alarm

D12 Yellow TR1 LINK TR1 Link OK

D13 Green TR1 ACTIVE TR1 Active (Tetra Mode)

D14 Red TR1 ALARM TR1 Alarm

D15 Yellow TR2 LINK TR2 Link OK

D16 Green TR2 ACTIVE TR2 Active (Tetra Mode)

D17 Red TR2 ALARM TR2 Alarm

D18 Yellow TR3 LINK TR3 Link OK

D19 Green TR3 ACTIVE TR3 Active (Tetra Mode)

D20 Red TR3 ALARM TR3 Alarm

D21 Yellow TR4 LINK TR4 Link OK

D22 Green TR4 ACTIVE TR4 Active (Tetra Mode)

D23 Red TR4 ALARM TR4 Alarm

BSC421 J31 + J32 connectors:

LED Color Marking Indication

--- ------ ------- --------------------------

J31 Green TR1 TR1 Ethernet Link/Activity

J31 Yellow TR2 TR2 Ethernet Link/Activity

J32 Green LAN LAN Ethernet Link/Activity

J32 Yellow WAN WAN Ethernet Link/Activity

J52 connector:

LED Color Indication

--- ------ ----------------------------

J52 Green LAN Ethernet Link Connection

J52 Yellow LAN Ethernet 100MBit

Page 1 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

General commands

F00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

F00 Display Software Version

F00

F00/BSC Display OM Red. BSC Connection status

F00/BSC

Command description:

Page 2 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSC Activation Control

F02 BSC ACTIVATION CONTROL

F02 Display BSC Activation Status

F02

F02/ACTIVATE BSC Activation Request

Sends Activation Request to other BSC

F02/ACTIVATE

F02/STANDBY/s Change Forced BSC Standby

+: Forced Standby

-: Normal

F02/STANDBY/.

Command description:

Page 3 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Alarms

F03 ALARMS

F03 Display BS Alarm state

F03

F03/C Clear all BS alarms

F03/C

Command description:

Page 4 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Radio Cell Status

F13 RADIO CELL STATUS

F13 Display Radio Cell Status

F13

Command description:

Page 5 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Power Supply Status

F14 POWER SUPPLY STATUS

F14 Display Power Supply Status

F14

Command description:

Page 6 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TR Status

F15 TR STATUS

F15 Display TR Status

F15

F15/c Display TR Status

F: Frequencies/Power

P: GPS Positions

V: Versions

L: Frequency and Power Limits

E: External Alarms

F15/.

F15/nn/A Display TR Alarm Flags

TR Address (11..48)

F15/../A

Command description:

Page 7 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

PS411 Status

F16 PS STATUS

F16 Display PS Status

F16

F16/nn Display PS Status

PS Address (11..47)

F16/..

F16/AL Display PS411 Alarm Flags

F16/AL

F16/REC Display PS411 Rectifier status

F16/REC

F16/OUT Display PS411 +14V/+26V status

F16/OUT

F16/LED Display PS411 LED status

F16/LED

Command description:

Page 8 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSS Message test queue

F63 BSS MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

F63 Display BSS Link Status

F63

F63/N Display next BSS message

F63/N

F63/N+ Display next BSS message extended

F63/N+

F63/S Set BSS message test queue to start

F63/S

F63/C Clear BSS message test queue

F63/C

F63/s BSS Message suppression

+: Display all BSS messages

-: Suppress some BSS messages (default)

F63/.

F63/hh/hh..hh Send Message to BSS

Message ID (00..FF hex)

Payload (hex)

0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

F63/../......................................................................

Command description:

Page 9 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

UDP Message test queue

F64 UDP MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

F64 Display UDP Link Status

F64

F64/N Display next UDP message

F64/N

F64/N+ Display next UDP message extended

F64/N+

F64/S Set UDP message test queue to start

F64/S

F64/C Clear UDP message test queue

F64/C

F64/s UDP Message suppression

+: Display all UDP messages

-: Suppress some UDP messages (default)

F64/.

F64/hh/hh..hh Send Message to Redundant BSC

Message ID (00..FF hex)

Payload (hex)

0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

F64/../......................................................................

Command description:

Page 10 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TR Message test queue

F65 TR MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

F65 Display TR Link Status

F65

F65/TCP Display TR TCP Connections

F65/TCP

F65/N Display next TR message

F65/N

F65/N+ Display next TR message extended

F65/N+

F65/S Set TR message test queue to start

F65/S

F65/C Clear TR message test queue

F65/C

F65/s TR Message suppression

+: Display all TR messages

-: Suppress some TR messages (default)

F65/.

F65/nn/hh/hh..hh Send Message to TR

TR Address (11..48)

Message ID (00..FF hex)

Payload (hex)

0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

34

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

F65/../../.....................................................................

.

Command description:

Page 11 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSC configuration

F70 BSC CONFIGURATION

F70 Display last File Save result

F70

F70/SAVE Save BSC Configuration

Note that BSC Configuration changes are saved automatically

F70/SAVE

Command description:

Page 12 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

System configurations

F71 Display Common Configurations

F71

F71/CNFG/+ Activate BSC

F71/CNFG/+

F71/CNFG/- Deactivate BSC

F71/CNFG/-

F71/BSCNO/n Change BSC Number

BSC Number

1: BSC1

2: BSC2

F71/BSCNO/.

F71/REDBSC/s Change Redundant BSC Selection

+: Select Redundant BSC

-: Deselect Redundant BSC

F71/REDBSC/.

F71/REDBSC/... Change Redundant BSC IP Address

IP address (000..255 in each field)

F71/REDBSC/...............

F71/BSS/... Change BSS IP Address

NB: Command only available in OEM Base Stations

IP address (000..255 in each field)

F71/BSS/...............

F71/BSS/nnnnn Change BSS Remote Port

NB: Command only available in OEM Base Stations

IP Port (Default: 42395)

F71/BSS/.....

F71/BSS/c Change BSS Message Protocol

TCP Server is the default recommended protocol

NB: Command only available in OEM Base Stations

BSS Message Protocol

U: UDP

S: TCP Server (recommended)

C: TCP Client

F71/BSS/.

Page 13 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TR Configuration

F75 Display TR Configuration

F75

F75/nn/TR412 Add TR412 Transceiver

TR Address (11..48)

F75/../TR412

F75/nn/TR421 Add TR421 Transceiver

TR Address (11..48)

F75/../TR421

F75/nn/REMOVE Remove TR

TR Address (11..48)

F75/../REMOVE

Page 14 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

PS Configuration

F76 Display PS Configuration

F76

F76/nn/PS411 Add PS411 Power Supply

PS Address (11..47)

F76/../PS411

F76/nn/PS421 Add PS421 Power Supply

PS Address (11..47)

F76/../PS421

F76/nn/REMOVE Remove PS

PS Address (11..47)

F76/../REMOVE

Page 15 of 15Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Software Versions:

S00 SOFTWARE VERSIONS

S00 Display software version

S00

S00/C Display BSS compiler options

S00/C

Command description:

Page 1 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

License Dongle:

S04 LICENSE DONGLE

S04 Display License Dongle Settings

Displays the settings read from dongle at application startup

NB: Only the Node BSC details are showed

S04

S04/I Display License Dongle Info

Displays the info read from dongle at application startup

S04/I

S04/D Display License Dongle Memory in Decimal

Displays the info read from dongle at application startup

S04/D

S04/H Display License Dongle Memory in Hex

Displays the info read from dongle at application startup

S04/H

Command description:

Page 2 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

System Nodes status:

S10 SYSTEM NODES STATUS

S10 Display Network Status

S10

S10/c.. Display Node Lists

Displays only first 30 BSC's

Displays only Active BSC's with function configured

List:

N : Nodes

NA : Node Alarms

NV : Node Versions

NC : Node Configuration

TRC: TR Configurations

TRO: TR Operational Use

L : Log Servers

S : Subscriber Registers

SCK: Subscriber Register Checksums

R : Tetra Cell

RC : Tetra Cell Configurations

RCN: Tetra Carrier Numbers

RNC: Tetra Neighbour Cells

V : Voice Gateways

P : Packet Data Gateways

A : Application Gateways

T : Terminal Gateways

S10/...

Page 3 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S10/nnn/nn/s/c.. Display Node Lists

Displays only Active BSC's

First Node Number (001..NodeMax)

Max. number of Lines (1..50)

+: Display all BSC's

-: Display only active BSC's with function configured

List:

N : Nodes

NA : Node Alarms

NV : Node Versions

NC : Node Configuration

TRC: TR Configurations

TRO: TR Operational Use

L : Log Servers

S : Subscriber Registers

SCK: Subscriber Register Checksums

R : Tetra Cells

RC : Tetra Cell Configurations

RCN: Tetra Carrier Numbers

RNC: Tetra Neighbour Cells

V : Voice Gateways

P : Packet Data Gateways

A : Application Gateways

T : Terminal Gateways

S10/.../.././...

S10/nnn/c/c.. Display one Node BSC

Node Number (001..NodeMax)

BSC:

A: Active BSC

1: BSC1

2: BSC2

Parameter:

N : Nodes

NI : Node Indicators

TR : TR Use

S : Subscriber Register

R : Tetra Cell

RCN: Tetra Carrier Numbers

RNC: Tetra Neighbour Cells

V : Voice Gateway

P : Packet Data Gateway

A : Application Gateway

T : Terminal Gateway

S10/..././...

S10/CLEAR Clear Node Message Sequence Error Counters

S10/CLEAR

Command description:

Page 4 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Log Server status:

S10/LS LOG SERVER STATUS

S10/LS Display Log Servers

S10/LS

S10/LS/c.. Display Log Server Lists

VER: Software Versions/Dates

IP : IP Addresses

S10/LS/...

S10/LS/CLEAR Clear Log Server Message Sequence Error Counters

S10/LS/CLEAR

S10/QUE Display Node Output Queues

S10/QUE

Command description:

Page 5 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Node Status:

S11 NODE STATUS

S11 Display Node Alarm Status

S11

Command description:

Page 6 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Tetra Cell Status:

S12 TETRA CELL STATUS

S12 Display Tetra Cell Status

S12

S12/CNT Display Tetra Timeslot Counts

S12/CNT

S12/TS Display Tetra Timeslot Status

S12/TS

S12/TS/cc/s Tetra Timeslot Operator Blocking/Deblocking

Device:

11..48: TR Address

QQ : Queue

Action:

+: Block Timeslot

-: Deblock Timeslot

S12/TS/../.

S12/TS/cc/n/s Tetra Timeslot Operator Blocking/Deblocking

Device:

11..48: TR Address

QQ : Queue

Timeslot Number (1..4 for TR, 1..2 for Queue)

Action:

+: Block Timeslot

-: Deblock Timeslot

S12/TS/.././.

S12/TR Display Tetra TR Status List

S12/TR

S12/NC Display Tetra Neighbour Cell List

S12/NC

S12/PD Display Tetra Packet Data Counters

S12/PD

S12/PD/C Clear Tetra Packet Data Counters

S12/PD/C

Page 7 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S12/CCK/c Tetra CCK change request

Requests immediate update of CCK for all mobiles

with Air Interface Encryption.

The Key change is about 6 seconds after the command.

See also S12 command

CCK change request kind

U: Unannounced

A: Announced

S12/CCK/.

Command description:

Page 8 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Voice Gateway Status:

S13 VOICE GATEWAY STATUS

S13 Display Voice Gateway Status

S13

S13/L Display Voice Gateway Status List

S13/L

S13/nnn Display Voice Gateway Instance Status

Voice Gateway Instance Number (000..nnn)

S13/...

Command description:

Page 9 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Packet Data Gateway Status:

S14 PACKET DATA GATEWAY STATUS

S14 Display Packet Data Gateway Status

S14

S14/N Display Packet Data Gateway Counters

S14/N

S14/C Clear Packet Data Gateway Counters

S14/C

Command description:

Page 10 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Application Gateway Status:

S15 APPLICATION GATEWAY STATUS

S15 Display Application Gateway Status

S15

S15/L Display Application Gateway Connection List

S15/L

S15/IX/nnn Display Application Gateway Connection (Index)

Index (000..nnn)

S15/IX/...

S15/SSI/nnnnnnnn Display Application Gateway Instance (SSI)

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S15/SSI/........

S15/USERNO/nn..n Display Application Gateway Connection (User Number)

User Number (0..9999999)

S15/USERNO/.......

Command description:

Page 11 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Terminal Gateway Status:

S16 TERMINAL GATEWAY STATUS

S16 Display Terminal Gateway Status

S16

S16/L Display Terminal Gateway Connection List

S16/L

S16/IX/nnn Display Terminal Gateway Connection (Index)

Index (000..nnn)

S16/IX/...

S16/SSI/nnnnnnnn Display Terminal Gateway Connection (SSI)

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S16/SSI/........

S16/USERNO/nn..n Display Terminal Gateway Connection (User Number)

User Number (0..9999999)

S16/USERNO/.......

Command description:

Page 12 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Subscriber Register:

S20 Display Subscriber Register

S20

S20/S Display Subscriber Register Status

S20/S

S20/CNT Display Subscriber Register Counts

S20/CNT

S20/CKS Display Subscriber Register Checksums

S20/CKS

S20/DL Display Master Subscriber Register Download status

Displays the status of the Master Subscriber Register

S20/DL

S20/REG Display Subscriber Registration Update status

Displays status of Subscriber Registration Update

Runs on all active BSC's to send Registration status of all

registered SSI on this Node to other nodes.

S20/REG

S20/REG/+ Start Subscriber Registration Update

Used to manually start a complete update of all other Nodes

with registration information of regstered SSI's on this Node.

NB: Command is for test purposes only.

S20/REG/+

S20/TEI/nnn..n Find TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

TEI (15 digits 0..9, A..F)

S20/TEI/...............

S20/SIM/nnn..n Find SIM Card Identity

SIM (20 digits 0..9, A..F)

S20/SIM/....................

S20/SECSET Display Security Set Renew Status

Displays the status of Security Set renewal

NB: Requires Key Register active and Subscriber Register not in slave mode

S20/SECSET

Page 13 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S20/SECSET/RENEW Start Security Set Renewal

Starts renewal of the Security Set for all Individual SSI.

The new Security Sets will be automatically replicated to all Nodes

1) If SIM is setup, SIM will be used for Key search

2) Else if TEI is setup, TEI will be used for Key search

3) Else no renewal is done

NB: Requires Key Register active and Subscriber Register not in slave mode

S20/SECSET/RENEW

S20/SAVE Save Subscriber Register to OM command file

Saved in "Subscr.txt" file in "Data" directory

S20/SAVE

S20/READ Read Subscriber Register from OM command file

Reads and executes "Subscr.txt" file in "Data" directory

Note, that it will add/change to the existing subscriber register.

The subscriber register can be cleaned before the read-in with the following

procedure:

1) Stop the BSC with Master Subscriber Register

2) Delete manually the files OrgV2.bin, ProfV2.bin and SubscrV2.bin

3) Restart the BSC

All Slaves will automatically be synchronized the the Master.

S20/READ

S20/CHECK Subscriber Register consistency check

S20/CHECK

S20/QUE Display Subscriber Register queues

S20/QUE

Page 14 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Profile Register:

S21 Display Profile Register Status

S21

S21/nnnn Display Profile

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/....

S21/L/nnnn/snn/nn Display Profile list

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..50)

S21/L/..../.../..

S21/nnnn/ADD/nnn/cc..c Add/Change Profile

The Home Organization number is used separate subscriber into isolated

organizations.

Note, that Home Organization value 0 has the special meaning "All" and is

intended to be used for e.g. the system operator.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Home Organization (000..999) (0=All)

Description

S21/..../ADD/.../........................

S21/nnnn/ASSORG Display Associated Organizations

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../ASSORG

S21/nnnn/ASSORG/s Change use of Associated Organizations

Activates/deactivates the use of Associated Organizations

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Associated Organizations

+: Activate

-: Deactivate

S21/..../ASSORG/.

S21/nnnn/ASSORG/nnn/s Add/Remove Associated Organization

Maximum 16 Associated Organizations can setup

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Associated Organization Number (001..999)

Action

+: Add

-: Remove

S21/..../ASSORG/.../.

Page 15 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/SSICALL/s Setup SSI Call Permission

Selects whether Individual Calls are allowed with SSI

If not selected, Individual Calls are only allowed wit User Number

Profile Number (0000..9999)

+: Allow Individual Calls with SSI

-: Only allow Individual Calls with User Number

S21/..../SSICALL/.

S21/nnnn/SSIGROUP/s Use SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group Calls

Selects the use of SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group Calls

to bypass the bug in certain mobiles (Motorola)

NB: This flag affects only GSSI's attached to the Profile (not ISSI)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

+: Use SSI as TPI for Group Call

-: Use User Number as TPI for Group Call (default)

S21/..../SSIGROUP/.

S21/nnnn/SECMODE/n Setup Security Mode

For optional modes, service will be allowed without Authentication/Air

InterFace encryption, when no Security Set is available or when the SSI

Authentication and Air Interface Encryption disable flags are set.

For mandatory modes, service will only be permitted with full Authentication

and Air Interface Encryption.

Note, that Air Interface Encryption requires, that permission is activated

in the License Dongle.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Mode:

0: Class 1, no Auth./AIE

1: Class 1, Auth. optional, AIE none

2: Class 1, Auth. mandatory, AIE none

3: Class 3, Aut. optional, AIE optional

4: Class 3, Auth. mandatory, AIE mandatory

S21/..../SECMODE/.

S21/nnnn/SECKSG/nn Setup Key Stream Generator

Used with Air Interface Encryption only

Note, that the TR shall support the selected KSG.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

KSG:

00: TEA1

01: TEA2

02: TEA3

03: TEA4

04..15: Reserved

S21/..../SECKSG/..

Page 16 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/SHORTNO/n/nn..n Setup Short Number Format

Specifies Short Number format

When a number with a length of 'Short Number Length' is dialled from the MS,

the 'Short Number Prefix' is automatically added before the lookup in the

Subscriber Register.

Leading zeroes in the Prefix are not significant.

The sum of 'Short Number Length' and the length of 'Short Number Prefix' may

not exceed 7 digits.

The function has no effect for PSTN calls.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Short Number Length (0..6) (0=Disabled)

Short Number Prefix ("" to "999999")

S21/..../SHORTNO/./......

S21/nnnn/DISPNO/nnnnnnn Setup Dispatcher User Number

User Number of the Dispatcher used to authorize calls

Leading zeroes are not significant

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Dispatcher User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for disabled)

S21/..../DISPNO/.......

S21/nnnn/PRIORITY/nn Select Call Priority

Sets the Call Priority

This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from mobiles

Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from mobiles will always be passed unchanged

Mobile controlled Priority is default (see this command)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Call Priority

01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)

06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)

12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)

S21/..../PRIORITY/..

S21/nnnn/PRIORITY/- Select Mobile controlled Call Priority

Lets the mobile control the Call and PTT Priority

This is the default setting

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../PRIORITY/-

S21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/nn.n Set Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout

Sets the time from last PTT released until Individual PTT Call termination.

Default setting is Disabled.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Individuel PTT Call Inactivity timeout

00.0 : Disabled

00.1..25.0: Timeout value [minutes]

S21/..../INDIVTIMEOUT/....

Page 17 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/- Disable Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout

Disables timeout of Individual PTT Call.

This is the default setting.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../INDIVTIMEOUT/-

S21/nnnn/GROUPTIMEOUT/nn Set Group Call Inactivity Timeout

Changes the time from last PTT released until Group Call termination.

Default value is 5 seconds.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Group Call Inactivity timeout (00..20 seconds)

S21/..../GROUPTIMEOUT/..

S21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/nnn Set max. Call Duration

Sets the maximum call duration of Individual Calls.

The default value is infinity (see this command)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Max Call Duration (001..250 minutes)

S21/..../CALLDURMAX/...

S21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/- Set Call Duration limit to infinity

Sets the maximum call duration of Individual Calls to infinity.

This is the default setting

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../CALLDURMAX/-

S21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/nnn Set max. PTT Duration

Sets the maximun talking period at Simplex Calls

The default value is disabled (Mobile controlled) (see this command)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Max PTT Duration (002..250 seconds)

S21/..../PTTDURMAX/...

S21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/- Disable PTT Duration limit

Sets the maximun talking period at Simplex Calls to be controlled

of the Mobile.

The system will still limit the time to maximum 310 seconds,

which is longer than the maximum 300 second setting for the mobile.

This is the default setting.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../PTTDURMAX/-

Page 18 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/nn Set Late Entry Timer

Sets the Late Entry Timer.

Controls the duraton between active Group announcements on

the Control Channel.

The default value is 15 seconds.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Late Entry Timer (01..60 seconds)

S21/..../LATEENTRY/..

S21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/- Disable Late Entry Timer

Disables Late Entry Timer.

Stops the active Group announcements on the Control Channel.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../LATEENTRY/-

S21/nnnn/CLASS/M Setup Subscriber Class Mobile controlled

See also Subscriber Class in Node configuration

Mobile controlled is the default setting

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../CLASS/M

S21/nnnn/CLASS/ss... Setup Subscriber Class Network controlled

Note, that all - means Mobile controlled

See also Subscriber Class in Node configuration

Mobile controlled is the default setting

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Class 1 (+,-)

Class 2 (+,-)

Class 3 (+,-)

Class 4 (+,-)

Class 5 (+,-)

Class 6 (+,-)

Class 7 (+,-)

Class 8 (+,-)

Class 9 (+,-)

Class 10 (+,-)

Class 11 (+,-)

Class 12 (+,-)

Class 13 (+,-)

Class 14 (+,-)

Class 15 (+,-)

Class 16 (+,-)

1234567890122456

S21/..../CLASS/................

Page 19 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/SERVRESTR Display SSI Service Restrictions

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../SERVRESTR

S21/nnnn/SERVRESTR/s Change SSI Service Restriction activation

Selects activation/deactivation of all SSI Service Restrictions

Profile Number (0000..9999)

+: Restrictions active according to individual flags

-: All Restrictions disabled (default)

S21/..../SERVRESTR/.

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/c Display Service Permission flags

Profile Number (0000..9999)

SSI Kind

M: Mobile SSI

D: Dial-In SSI

A: Application SSI

T: Terminal SSI

S21/..../SERVPERM/.

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/nn/c Change Mobile SSI Service Permission flag

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Mobile SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)

00: Individual Duplex Call to Mobile

01: Individual Duplex Call from Mobile

02: Individual Simplex Call to Mobile

03: Individual Simplex Call from Mobile

04: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

05: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

06: Individual Call to Application Gateway

07: Individual Call from Application Gateway

08: Group Call

09: Send SDS

10: Receive Individual SDS

11: Packet Data Call

12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway

13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway

Flag

+: Service allowed

A: Service allowed with Dispatcher Authorization

(00..07 only)

-: Service not allowed

S21/..../SERVPERM/M/../.

Page 20 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/nn/s Change Dial-In SSI Service Permission flag

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Dial-In SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)

06: Group Call

Flag

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

S21/..../SERVPERM/D/../.

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/nn/s Change Application SSI Service Permission flag

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Application SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)

00: Individual Call to Mobile

01: Individual Call from Mobile

02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

04: Individual Call to Application Gateway

05: Individual Call from Application Gateway

06: Group Call

07: Send SDS

08: Receive Individual SDS

12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway

13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway

Flag

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

S21/..../SERVPERM/A/../.

Page 21 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/nn/s Change Terminal SSI Service Permission flag

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Terminal SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)

00: Individual Call to Mobile

01: Individual Call from Mobile

02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

04: Individual Call to Application Gateway

05: Individual Call from Application Gateway

06: Group Call

07: Send SDS

08: Receive Individual SDS

12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway

13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway

Flag

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

S21/..../SERVPERM/T/../.

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/cc..c Change all Mobile SSI Service Permission flags

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Mobile SSI Service Permission Flags:

+: Service allowed

A: Service allowed with Dispatcher Authorization (00..07

only)

-: Service not allowed

00: Individual Duplex Call to Mobile

01: Individual Duplex Call from Mobile

02: Individual Simplex Call to Mobile

03: Individual Simplex Call from Mobile

04: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

05: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

06: Individual Call to Application Gateway

07: Individual Call from Application Gateway

08: Group Call

09: Send SDS

10: Receive Individual SDS

11: Packet Data Call

12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway

13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway

14: (Spare)

15: (Spare)

S21/..../SERVPERM/M/................

Page 22 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/ss..s Change all Dial-In SSI Service Permission flags

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Dial-In SSI Service Permission Flags:

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

00: (Spare)

01: (Spare)

02: (Spare)

03: (Spare)

04: (Spare)

05: (Spare)

06: Group Call

07: (Spare)

08: (Spare)

09: (Spare)

10: (Spare)

11: (Spare)

12: (Spare)

13: (Spare)

14: (Spare)

15: (Spare)

S21/..../SERVPERM/D/................

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/ss..s Change all Application SSI Service Permission flags

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Application SSI Service Permission Flags:

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

00: Individual Call to Mobile

01: Individual Call from Mobile

02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

04: Individual Call to Application Gateway

05: Individual Call from Application Gateway

06: Group Call

07: Send SDS

08: Receive Individual SDS

09: (Spare)

10: (Spare)

11: (Spare)

12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway

13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway

14: (Spare)

15: (Spare)

S21/..../SERVPERM/A/................

Page 23 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/ss..s Change all Terminal SSI Service Permission flags

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Terminal SSI Service Permission Flags:

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

00: Individual Call to Mobile

01: Individual Call from Mobile

02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

04: Individual Call to Application Gateway

05: Individual Call from Application Gateway

06: Group Call

07: Send SDS

08: Receive Individual SDS

09: (Spare)

10: (Spare)

11: (Spare)

12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway

13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway

14: (Spare)

15: (Spare)

S21/..../SERVPERM/T/................

S21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR Display Group Call Restriction mode

The Group Call Restriction mode is used to limit subscribers to participate

in calls only to specific Groups according to the Group Permission Table.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../GROUPRESTR

S21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR/s Change Group Call Restriction mode

The Group Call Restriction mode is used to limit subscribers to participate

in calls only to specific Groups according to the Group Permission Table.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Group Call Restriction mode

-: No check

D: Check dial-in calls only

A: Check all calls

S21/..../GROUPRESTR/.

Page 24 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/ADD/s Add/Change Group Permission Table entry

The Group Call Permission Table is used to check for a subscribers permission

to participate in a Group call to a specific Group number.

The table is only used if Group Restriction mode is selected.

Maximum 16 permitted groups can be setup.

NB: Leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Group User Number (0000001..9999999)

PTT Permission

+: PTT allowed

-: PTT not allowed

SDS Permission

+: SDS allowed to Group

-: SDS not allowed to Group

S21/..../GROUPPERM/......./ADD/./.

S21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/REM Remove Group Permission Table entry

The Group Call Permission Table is used to check for a subscribers permission

to participate in a Groul call to a specific Group number.

The table is used according to the Group Restriction mode selection.

NB: Leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Group User Number (0000001..9999999)

S21/..../GROUPPERM/......./REM

S21/nnnn/CELL Display Radio Cell Restrictions

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../CELL

S21/nnnn/CELL/s Activate/Deactivate Radio Cell Restrictions

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Radio Cell restrictions

+: Activate (Only permitted Radio Cells allowed)

-: Deactivate (All Radio Cells allowed)

S21/..../CELL/.

S21/nnnn/CELL/nnn/ss..s Setup Radio Cell Permissions

For Mobile SSI's the flag gives permission to the Tetra Mobile to register

and use the Radio Cell.

For Group SSI's the flag gives permission for the group to be setup in the

Radio Cell.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Node Number of first flag (000..999)

Permission Flag

+: Mobile or Group allowed in Radio Cell

-: Mobile or Group not allowed in Radio Cell

S21/..../CELL/.../..................................................

Page 25 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S21/nnnn/VGNODE/n/nnn Setup Voice Gateway Node

Voice Gateway Nodes used of the Profile members.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

1: Primary Voice Gateway

2: Alternate Voice Gateway

Node Number (001..999, 000 for disabled)

S21/..../VGNODE/./...

S21/nnnn/PGNODE/n/nnn Setup Packet Data Gateway Node

Packet Date Gateway Nodes used of the Profile members.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

1: Primary Packet Data Gateway

2: Alternate Packet Data Gateway

Node Number (001..999, 000 for disabled)

S21/..../PGNODE/./...

S21/nnnn/POSUSERNO/n/nn..n Setup Position Destination User Number

Terminal Gateway sends Position Report to these Numbers

Profile Number (0000..9999)

1: Destination 1

2: Destination 2

User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for disabled)

S21/..../POSUSERNO/./.......

S21/nnnn/DNS/... Setup DNS Server IP Address

DNS Server IP Address given to the Mobile at DHCP Request

Profile Number (0000..9999)

IP Address (000..255 in each field)

S21/..../DNS/...............

S21/nnnn/DEL Delete Profile

Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../DEL

Page 26 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Subscriber Register SSI:

S22 Display SSI Register Status

S22

S22/nnnnnnnn Display SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/........

S22/L/nnnnnnnn/snn/nn Display SSI list

First SSI (00000001..16777215)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..45)

S22/L/......../.../..

S22/nnnnnnnn/REG Display SSI Registration

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../REG

S22/nnnnnnnn/REG/GROUP Display SSI Attached Groups

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../REG/GROUP

S22/TSI/... Display TSI

MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)

MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)

SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

S22/TSI/....:.....:........

S22/TSI/.../L Display TSI Chain List

NB: For debug only!

MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)

MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)

SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

S22/TSI/....:.....:......../L

S22/TSICHAIN/nnnnnn Display TSI Chain List

NB: For debug only!

SubIx (000000..nnnnnn)

S22/TSICHAIN/......

S22/TSIIXTB Display TSI Indax Table

NB: For debug only!

S22/TSIIXTB

Page 27 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI

User Number:

Leading zeroes are not significant

With all-zeroes User Number is disabled

IP Address:

Only LSB's are significant

Address will be masked with Subscriber IP Address Segment Mask

Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed

With all-zero significant bits IP Address is disabled

SSI of Mobile (00000001..16777215)

SSI Kind:

M: Mobile (Tetra)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

User Number (0000001..9999999)

IP address (000..255 in each field)

S22/......../ADD/./..../......./...............

S22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI

User Number:

Leading zeroes are not significant

With all-zeroes User Number is disabled

SSI (00000001..16777215)

SSI Kind:

P: Personal

G: Group

E: Emergency

D: Dial-In

A: Application

T: Terminal

Profile Number (0000..9999)

User Number (0000001..9999999)

S22/......../ADD/./..../.......

S22/nnnnnnnn/DESCR/... Setup SSI Description

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Description

S22/......../DESCR/........................

S22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/... Setup Visiting TSI

NB: Only available for Mobile, Group, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)

MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)

SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

S22/......../TSI/....:.....:........

Page 28 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/- Clear Visiting TSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../TSI/-

S22/nnnnnnnn/BLOCK/s Change SSI Blocking

SSI (00000001..16777215)

+: SSI Block

-: SSI Unblock

S22/......../BLOCK/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/PINCODE/cc..c Change PIN Code

PIN Code 1..9 digits, leading zeroes not significant

NB: Only available for DialIn, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

PIN Code:

1..999999999: Value

-: Disabled

S22/......../PINCODE/.........

S22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/... Setup TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

TEI (15 hex digits 0..9 or A..F)

S22/......../TEI/...............

S22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/- Clear TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../TEI/-

S22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/... Setup SIM ID

ID of SIM Card if present

Shall be cleared if not used

If SIM ID is setup, SIM ID is used to find K in Key Register,

else TEI is used.

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

SIM ID (20 hex digits 0..9 or A..F)

S22/......../SIM/....................

S22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/- Clear SIM ID

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../SIM/-

Page 29 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S22/nnnnnnnn/AUTHDIS/s Change Mobile Authentication Disable Flag

Note, that Authentication disable is not possible in mandatory

modes selected in the Profile register.

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Authentication Disable Flag

+: Disable Authentication

-: Authentication not disabled

S22/......../AUTHDIS/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/AIEDIS/s Change Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag

Note, that Air Interface Encryption disable is not possible in mandatory

mode selected in the Profile register.

NB: Only available for Mobile and Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag

+: Disable Air Interface Encryption

-: Air Interface Encryption not disabled

S22/......../AIEDIS/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/R Renew Security Set from Security Key

The Security Key will be search with the following references:

1) If SIM is setup, SIM will be used for Key search

2) Else if TEI is setup, TEI will be used for Key search

3) Else no renewal is done

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../SECSET/R

S22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/... Setup Security Set

This command is for manual test only

Security set update should normally be done from Security Key

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Status

U: Unencrypted

E: Encrypted

RS (20 hex digits)

KS (32 hex digits)

KS' (32 hex digits)

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5

4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

S22/......../SECSET/./..................../................................/...

.............................

Page 30 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/C Clear Security Set

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../SECSET/C

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPTEXT/cc..c Setup Group Text Line

Group Text Line to show on the Terminal Screen

NB: Only available for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Group Text Line

S22/......../GROUPTEXT/...............

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL Display Group Include Table

If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also

include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.

NB: Only available for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../GROUPINCL

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/s Enable/Disable Group Include Table

If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also

include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.

NB: Only available for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Group Table

+: Activate

-: Deactivate

S22/......../GROUPINCL/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/ADD Add/Change Group Include Table entry

If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also

include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.

Note that leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant

NB: Only allowed for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

User Number (0000001..9999999)

S22/......../GROUPINCL/......./ADD

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/REM Remove Group Include Table entry

If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also

include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.

Note that leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant

NB: Only allowed for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

User Number (0000001..9999999)

S22/......../GROUPINCL/......./REM

Page 31 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRF/c Change Call Transfer

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, DialIn and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Call Transfer Type

-: None

R: Not Reachable (Weak) (Not registered/no radio

contact)

A: No Answer (Medium) (Incl. Not Reachable)

B: Busy (Strong) (Incl. No Answer and Not

Reachable)

U: Unconditional (Always) (Excluding Blocked SSI)

N: Number Change (Always) (Including Blocked SSI)

S22/......../CALLTRF/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFNO/cc..c Change Call Transfer Number

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, DialIn, Emergency and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Number (0..9,#,*,+,p or w)

S22/......../CALLTRFNO/..............................

S22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFTIME/nn Change Call Transfer delay time

Used to change the Alerting time before Call Transfer takes place

for "Call Transfer at no B-answer"

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, DialIn and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Time in seconds (05..60, default 30)

S22/......../CALLTRFTIME/..

S22/nnnnnnnn/SUBREG/s Change Subscriber Register change permission

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Subscriber Register changes from Application

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

S22/......../SUBREG/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/DISCREETLIST/s Change Discreet Listening permission

Controls the permission for Discreet Listening from the Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Discreet Listening

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

S22/......../DISCREETLIST/.

Page 32 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S22/nnnnnnnn/AMBIENCELIST/s Change Ambience Listening permission

Controls the permission for Ambience Listening from the Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Ambience Listening

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

S22/......../AMBIENCELIST/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/TEMPENDIS/s Change Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable permission

Controls the permission to make Temporary Enable/Disable of a Mobile

from the Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

S22/......../TEMPENDIS/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/PERMDIS/s Change Permanent Mobile Disable permission

Controls the permission to make Permanant Disable of a Mobile from the

Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Permanent Mobile Disable

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

S22/......../PERMDIS/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPMAN/s Change Mobile Group Management permission

Controls the permission to change Group attachment and setup DGNA Groups

in Mobiles from the Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Group Management

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

S22/......../GROUPMAN/.

Page 33 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S22/nnnnnnnn/NUMBERMOD/s Change Number Modification Permission

Gives permission for the Gateway to present an external provided

number instead of the SSI's User Number.

Shall be set if the SSI is e.g. a Group Bridge or similar.

NB: Only available for Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Number Modification Permission

+: Number Modification allowed

-: Number Modification not allowed

S22/......../NUMBERMOD/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/EMERGPRI/nn Change Emergency Number Call Priority

Sets the Call Priority of an Emergency SSI

This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from mobiles

Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from mobiles will always be passed unchanged

Call Priority 15 (Emergency Call Priority) is recommended for Emergency Numbers

NB: Only available for Emergency SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Call Priority

00 : Mobile Controlled

01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)

06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)

12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)

15 : Emergency Call Priority

S22/......../EMERGPRI/..

S22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET Display Target Table

NB: Command only available for Personal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../TARGET

S22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/c Display Targets

Displays sorted according to Preference

NB: Command only available for Personal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Target Kind

V: Voice Call targets

S: SDS Call targets

I: IP Call targets

S22/......../TARGET/.

Page 34 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/n/c/c/c/cc..c Add/Change/Remove Target

Add, Change or Remove a Target Number for the Personal SSI.

Targets with different Preferences will be accessed sequentially

starting with Preference 0.

Targets with same Preference will be accessed in parallel.

Voice Call:

Call will be through-connected to the Target making B-answer

SDS Call:

SDS will be send to all registered Targets.

IP Call:

IP connection will be done to first Targets with IP registation.

NB: Command only available for Personal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Target table position (0..7)

Voice Call Preference (1..8 or -)

SDS Call Preference (1..8 or -)

IP Call Preference (1..8 or -)

Target Number (Empty to remove)

S22/......../TARGET/././././..............................

S22/nnnnnnnn/DEL Delete SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../DEL

Page 35 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Subscriber Register User Number:

S23 Display SSI Register Status

S23

S23/nnnnnnn Display User Number

User Number (0000001..9999999)

S23/.......

S23/L/nnnnnnn/snn/nn Display User Number list

First User Number (0000001..9999999)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..45)

S23/L/......./.../..

Page 36 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Subscriber Register IP Address:

S24 Display SSI Register Status

S24

S24/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnn Display IP Address

Only LSB's are significant

Address will be masked with Subscriber IP Address Segment Mask

Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed

IP Address (000..255 in each field)

S24/...............

S24/L/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/snn/nn Display IP Address list

First IP Address (000..255 in each field)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..45)

S24/L/.............../.../..

Page 37 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Security Key Register:

S25 Display Key Register Status

S25

S25/T/hh..h Display TEI Key

TEI (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/T/...............

S25/S/hh..h Display SIM Key

SIM ID (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/S/....................

S25/I/nn..n Display SSI Key

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S25/I/........

S25/T/hhh..h/c/... Add/Change TEI Key

TEI (Hex 0..9, A..F)

Key Status

C: Clear Key (Encrypted at register save)

A: AES Encrypted Key (Saved unchanged in KeyV2

register)

S: Scrambled Key (Descrambled and Encrypted at

register save)

E: Encrypted Key (As saved in old Key register)

K key (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/T/..............././................................

S25/S/hhh..h/c/... Add/Change SIM Key

SIM ID (Hex 0..9, A..F)

Key Status

C: Clear Key (Encrypted at register save)

A: AES Encrypted Key (Saved unchanged in KeyV2

register)

S: Scrambled Key (Descrambled and Encrypted at

register save)

E: Encrypted Key (As saved in old Key register)

K key (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/S/...................././................................

Page 38 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S25/I/nn..n/c/... Add/Change SSI Key

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Key Status

C: Clear Key (Encrypted at register save)

A: AES Encrypted Key (Saved unchanged in KeyV2 register)

S: Scrambled Key (Descrambled and Encrypted at register save)

E: Encrypted Key (As saved in old Key register)

K key (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/I/.......././................................

S25/T/hhh..h/DEL Delete TEI Key

TEI (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/T/.............../DEL

S25/S/hhh..h/DEL Delete SIM Key

SIM ID (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/S/..................../DEL

S25/I/nn..n/DEL Delete SSI Key

SSI (00000001..16777215)

S25/I/......../DEL

S25/RELOAD Reload Key File from Disk

Reloads the Key Register "Key.bin" file

NB: Register is cleared before the reload

S25/RELOAD

S25/SAVE Save Key Register in OM command file

Key Register saved in "Key.txt" file

S25/SAVE

S25/READ Read Key Register from OM command file

Reads the "Key.txt" OM Command file

NB: Makes Add/Change to the existing register content

S25/READ

Page 39 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S25/IMPORT/cc..c Import Mobile Programmer File

1) Reads REF,K records into the Security Key Register

If REF is existing K is changed, else new REF,K set is added

2) Reads REF,ITSI records

Updates REF (TEI or SIM) in SSI Register if ITSI is existing

ITSI with zero or matching MCC and MNC is accepted

Deletes SIM if TEI is changed or TEI if SIM is changed

Coding:

REF(TEI)(19 Decimal digits): T0123456789012345678

REF(TEI)(15 Hex digits)....: T0x0123456789ABCDE

REF(SIM)(20 Hex digits)....: S0x0123456789ABCDEF0123

REF(SSI)(8 Decimal digits).: I01234567

K (32 Hex digits)..........: 0x0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF

ITSI (15 Decimal digits....: 012345678901234

ITSI (12 Hex digits).......: 0x0123456789AB

Record examples:

TEI,K...: T0x000087171809780,0x0E4A01E34CBC5D53AD5D5DECCB11C0EA;

SIM,K...: S0x12345000087171809780,0x0E4A01E34CBC5D53AD5D5DECCB11C0EA;

SSI,K...: I01234567,0x0E4A01E34CBC5D53AD5D5DECCB11C0EA;

TEI,ITSI: T0x000087171809780,0x5DECCB11C0EA;

SIM,ITSI: S0x12345000087171809780,0x5DECCB11C0EA;

File Path + Name on connected BSC

S25/IMPORT/..................................................................

S25/QUE Display File Write Queue

File write queue for the "Key.bin" file

S25/QUE

Page 40 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Organization Register:

S26 Display Organization Register Status

S26

S26/nnn Display Organization

Organization Number (000..999)

S26/...

S26/L/nnn/snn/nn Display Organization list

Organization Number (000..999)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..50)

S26/L/.../.../..

S26/nnn/ADD/cc..c Add/Change Organization

NB: All ranges automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Description

S26/.../ADD/........................

S26/nnn/PROFNO/... Change Profile Number range

Limits the Profile Numbers, which can be added via an Application Gateway

NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Lowest permitted Profile Number (0000..9999)

Highest permitted Profile Number (0000..9999) (0=Barred)

S26/.../PROFNO/..../....

S26/nnn/SSI/... Change SSI range

Limits the SSIs, which can be added via an Application Gateway

NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Lowest permitted SSI (00000001..16777215)

Highest permitted SSI (00000001..16777215) (0=Barred)

S26/.../SSI/......../........

Page 41 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S26/nnn/USERNO/... Change User Number range

Limits the User Numbers, which can be added via an Application Gateway

Leading zeroes in User Numbers are not significant

NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Lowest permitted User Number (0000001..9999999)

Highest permitted User Number (0000001..9999999)

(0=Barred)

S26/.../USERNO/......./.......

S26/nnn/IPADDR/... Change IP Address range

Limits the IP Addresses, which can be added via an Application Gateway

Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed

NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Lowest permitted IP Address (000..255)

Highest permitted IP Address (000..255)

(0=Barred)

S26/.../IPADDR/.............../...............

S26/nnn/PUBLRESTR/s Change Publish Restriction flag

Restricts the publishing of the Organisation.

Setting this flag will hide the existence of the Organization for all except

Home Organization Applications.

Organization Number (000..999)

Publish Restriction flag

+: Publish to Home Organization Applications only

-: Publish to all Applications

S26/.../PUBLRESTR/.

S26/nnn/NODERESTR/s Change Node Status Restriction flag

Restricts the publishing of Node Status.

Setting this flag will hide the Node Status in Applications.

Organization Number (000..999)

Node Status Restriction flag

+: Node Status NOT sent to Applications

-: Node Status sent to Applications

S26/.../NODERESTR/.

S26/nnn/DEL Delete Organization

Organization Number (000..999)

S26/.../DEL

Page 42 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Audio Messages

S30 AUDIO MESSAGES

S30 Display Audio Message status

The Audio Messages are Voice and Tone sequences used in the system as

Audio announcements.

They are read-in from .wav files located in the Audio directory.

Format shall be CCITT A-Law 8kHz 8-bit mono.

English versions are delivered from the factory as standard

Messages in different languages and with adjusted content can be

recorded with the Windows "Sound Recorder" tool.

When loaded from the files, versions coded as Tetra Voice are also

generated automatically.

S30

S30/R Reload Audio Messages from disk

Reads all .wav files in the Audio directory.

Tetra Audio versions are also generated automatically.

S30/R

Command description:

Page 43 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TetraFlex Shares

S31 TETRAFLEX SHARES

S31 Display TetraFlex Shares

Displays the list of Version Dates in the TetraFlex share.

Automatically updated every 30 second.

S31

S31/nn Display TetraFlex Share

Share Number (00..nn)

S31/..

S31/nn/nnnn-nn-nn Change Version Date

Changes all File Dates to the selected value

Used to set the Version Date to the correct one, if the has been

accidentially modified.

Time is set to 12:00:00 UTC

Share Number (00..nn)

File Date (e.g. 2012-06-27)

S31/../....-..-..

Command description:

Page 44 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

InterNode OM Command

S50 INTERNODE OM COMMAND

S50 Display Command function

S50

S50/D Display last received OM Command/Response

S50/D

S50/ccc/cc..c Send OM Command to other Node(s)

See OM Help for available commands

Multicommands separated with the '|' character is supported.

As '|' however can not been send as it will be interpreted of the OM Program,

the character '^' shall be used instead. The OM S50 command interpreter will

modify

'^' to '|' before it is send.

Node number (ALL or 001..999)

OM Command String

S50/.../......................................................................

Command description:

Page 45 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Application Gateway Subscriber Register Command

S51 API SUBSCRIBER REGISTER COMMAND

S51 Display Command function

S51

S51/D Display last API Command/Response

S51/D

S51/nnnnnnnn/cc..c Execute API Command

The command simulates commands from the ApiDll to modify the Subscriber

Register.

Commands shall be entered in the ApiDll format ("21/..., 22/... and 26/...).

The Gateway will make syntax and permission check on the command, modify

it to the BSC format (S21/..., S22/... and S26/...) and send it to the

Master Subscriber Register Node.

See ApiDll Help for command syntax.

See also 20/QUE, 51/D and 51/... commands for the ApiDll.

See also S51/D for the Gateway Node.

See also S50/D and S20/QUE commands for the Master Subscriber Register Node.

SSI of of Application DLL (00000001..16777215)

Command String

S51/......../.................................................................

Command description:

Page 46 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Log Server Message test queue:

S64 LOG SERVER MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

S64 Display Log Server Connection Status

S64

S64/N Display next Log Server message

S64/N

S64/N+ Display next Log Server message extended

S64/N+

S64/S Set Log Server message test queue to start

S64/S

S64/C Clear Log Server message test queue

S64/C

S64/s Log Server Message suppression

+: Display all Log Server messages

-: Suppress some Log Server messages (default)

S64/.

S64/hh/hh..hh Send message to Home Log Servers

Message ID (hex)

Optional Parameters (hex)

02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

S64/../..................................................................

S64/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/hh/hh..hh Send message to Log Servers

IP multicast address (000..255 in each field)

Message ID (hex)

Optional Parameters (hex)

02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

28 30 32

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

S64/.............../../........................................................

..........

Command description:

Page 47 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Internode Control Message test queue:

S65 INTERNODE CONTROL MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

S65 Display Internode Connection status

S65

S65/N Display next Internode Control Message

S65/N

S65/N+ Display next Internode Control Message extended

S65/N+

S65/S Set Internode Control Message test queue to start

S65/S

S65/C Clear Internode Control Message test queue

S65/C

S65/s Internode Control Message suppression

+: Display all Internode Control messages

-: Suppress some Internode Control messages (default)

S65/.

S65/ALL/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to all Nodes

Message ID (hex)

Optional Parameters (hex)

02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

S65/ALL/../..................................................................

S65/SD/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to Subscriber Register Download Nodes

Message ID (hex)

Optional Parameters (hex)

02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

S65/SD/../..................................................................

S65/DL/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to Discreet Listening Nodes

Message ID (hex)

Optional Parameters (hex)

02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

S65/DL/../..................................................................

Page 48 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S65/nnn/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to specific Node

Node Number (001..NodeMax)

Message ID (hex)

Optional Parameters (hex)

02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

S65/.../../..................................................................

S65/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to specific IP Address

IP address (000..255 in each field)

Message ID (hex)

Optional Parameters (hex)

02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

S65/.............../../......................................................

Command description:

Page 49 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSS Configuration Commands:

S70 Display last file save result

S70

S70/SAVE Save BSS Configuration

Note that BSS Configuration changes are saved automatically

S70/SAVE

Page 50 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

General Node configuration:

S71 Display General Node configuration

S71

S71/NODENO/nnn Change Node Number

Max. node number is limited of:

a) Compile constant, see S00/C command

b) License Dongle, see S04 command

Node Number (001..nnn)

S71/NODENO/...

S71/IP/MCADDR/... Change Multicast Base IP Address

Defines the start address for the Multicast Address block

The entered address is truncated with a /28 mask

Used addresses (for default Base Address):

224.239.016.001: Main Internode Control Multicast Address

224.239.016.003: Discreet Listening Multicast Address

224.239.016.004: Subscriber Register Download Multicast Address

Default Base Address: 224.239.016.000

IP address (224.000.002.000..239.255.255.254)

S71/IP/MCADDR/...............

S71/IP/MCPORT/nnnnn Change Control Multicast Port Number

UDP Port Number for Multicast communication with other Nodes

Default Port Number is 42400

Multicast UDP Port (00000..65535)

S71/IP/MCPORT/.....

S71/IP/UCPORT/nnnnn Change Control Unicast Port Number

UDP Port Number for Unicast communication with other Nodes

Default Port Number is 42401

Unicast UDP Port (00000..65535)

S71/IP/UCPORT/.....

S71/IP/LOGADDR/... Change Log Multicast IP Address

IP Multicast Address for the Serving Log Servers

If more than one Log Server Group is used, change the last field

to the actual Log Server Group Number

Default Address is 224.239.017.001

IP address (224.000.002.000..239.255.255.254)

S71/IP/LOGADDR/...............

Page 51 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S71/IP/LOGPORT/nnnnn Change Log UDP Port Number

UDP Port Number for Log Servers

Default Port Number is 42402

UDP Port (00000..65535)

S71/IP/LOGPORT/.....

S71/IP/CMOIPADDR/... Change CMoIP Multicast IP Address

Most significant bytes of IP Multicast Address for CMoIP

Default Address is 225.000.x.x

CMoIP IP address (225.000..239.255)

S71/IP/CMOIPADDR/.......

S71/MCC/nnnn Change Mobile Country Code

MCC (0001..1023)

S71/MCC/....

S71/MNC/nnnnn Change Mobile Network Code

MNC (0001..16383)

S71/MNC/.....

S71/NODETIMEOUT/nnnn Change Inter-node Timeout

Changes the timeout of responses from other Nodes.

Shall be at least 200 msec. larger than the peak roud-trip time to any Node.

Use Ping.exe to determine the actual round-trip time.

Note, that the last digit will be truncated to zero.

The default value is 500 msec.

Inter-node Timeout (0200..2550 [msec])

S71/NODETIMEOUT/....

S71/MULTIVOCODER/s Change Multivocoder selection

Changes the function of the Vocoders for the Gateways

Disabled:

Core network uses always Tetra Coded Voice

Functionality as in TetraFlex before version 7.60

Enabled:

Core network uses several different Voice codings

Allows higher quality voice between Appl., Term. and Voice Gateways

Requirement:

1) Vocoders shall be present in BS/TR

2) Faster BS downlink IP connection (2048/512kbit/s for 4-carrier BS)

NB: This setting shall be the same on all Nodes in the system

Multivocoder

-: Disabled

+: Enabled

S71/MULTIVOCODER/.

Page 52 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S71/VOICEBUF/n Change Voice Buffer length

Changes the initial length of the Voice Elastic Buffer

This value is used to select a resonable balance between delay and slips.

Lower value gives lower average speech delay but more slips.

Higher value gives less slips but higher average speech delay.

Default value is 2 Voice Frames (2x60msec.)

A higher value can improve voice quality if the transmission network has

high jitter and/or End-to-End Encryption is used.

Initial Voice Buffer Length (1..5, default=2)

S71/VOICEBUF/.

S71/SUBIPADDR/... Change Subscriber IP Address Segment

IP Address Segment used for Mobiles for Packet Data

NB: The LSB of the Address is automatically cleared by the Mask

Default Address is 172.28.0.0/16

IP Address

Mask (12..30)

S71/SUBIPADDR/.............../..

S71/SUBMODE/c Change Subscriber Register Mode

Controls replication between Nodes/BSC's

A BSC set to Master is automatically running Slave when Standby

The two redundant BSC's shall have same setting

For single node systems with redundant BSC's, both shall be set to Master

Warning: Do only select Master Mode on one Node!

Subscriber Register Mode

-: Single (No update to/from other BSC's)

M: Master (Active BSC : Sends updates to all slave BSC's)

(Standby BSC: Gets update from Master, no changes)

S: Slave (Gets update from Master, no OM/NM changes)

S71/SUBMODE/.

S71/KEYREG/s Key Register activation

Activates the Security Key Register function

NB: Shall only be activated on BSC's with Subscriber

Register in Single or Master mode

Key Register

+: Activation

-: Deactivation

S71/KEYREG/.

Page 53 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S71/SHARENAME/cc..c Share Name

Sets the Share Name for the File Share for updates for ApiDll, Dispatcher,

Clients etc.

Shall match the Share Name used for "Share" directory.

For a single-node PC the default value is "TetraFlex".

For a Multi-node PC the share for each Node shall be setup to be different.

Share Name

S71/SHARENAME/................................

S71/SHAREUSER/cc..c Share User

Sets the Share User Name for the File Share.

The User shall have Read access to the Share.

The default value is "Tetra".

Share User

S71/SHAREUSER/................................

S71/SHAREPASSWORD/cc..c Share Password

Sets the Share Password for the File Share User.

The default value is "Tetra".

Share Password

S71/SHAREPASSWORD/................................

S71/TR Display TR Use

S71/TR

S71/TR/nn/s Change TR Use

Note, that S72/TR/.. and S77/TR/... commands can also change the

setting from Unused to Tetra respectively.

TR Address (11..48)

TR Use:

-: Unused

T: Tetra

S: Spare

S71/TR/../.

Page 54 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Tetra Cell Configuration:

S72 Display Tetra Cell configuration

S72

S72/CNFG/+ Activate Tetra Cell

Only possible if allowed of License Dongle

S72/CNFG/+

S72/CNFG/- Deactivate Tetra Cell

S72/CNFG/-

S72/BSPWR/+nn.n Change Tetra BS Output Power

Command used set the Tetra BS Antenna Tetra carrier output power

at un-activated Power Reduction.

Available range:

BS421 : +27.0 to +40.0 dBm

TR412 : +26.0 to +40.0 dBm

TR412H: +30.0 to +44.0 dBm

If the value is lower or higher than the permitted range, the minimum

or maximum power respectively will be set.

NB: This setting controls the Antenna Power, when Power Reduction in not

activated.

Normal Tetra Antenna Power per carrier (+26.0 to +44.0dBm)

S72/BSPWR/+....

S72/BSPWR/- Set Tetra BS Output Power to TR Controlled

S72/BSPWR/-

S72/BSPWR/RED/+nn.n Change Tetra BS Reduced Output Power

Command used set the Tetra BS Antenna Tetra carrier output power

at activated Power Reduction.

Reduced Power Output mode is activated through an input on either SB421

or BS41x.

Available range:

BS421 : +27.0 to +40.0 dBm (0.5 to 10W Tetra)

TR412 : +26.0 to +40.0 dBm (0.4 to 10W Tetra)

TR412H: +30.0 to +44.0 dBm (1.0 to 25W Tetra)

If the value is lower or higher than the permitted range, the minimum

or maximum power respectively will be set.

Reduced Tetra Antenna Power per carrier (+26.0 to +44.0dBm)

S72/BSPWR/RED/+....

S72/BSPWR/RED/- Set Tetra BS Reduced Output Power to TR Controlled

S72/BSPWR/RED/-

S72/BSPWR/RED/N Set Tetra BS Reduced Output Power to Normal

S72/BSPWR/RED/N

Page 55 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/SCCH/n Change number of SCCH to setup

Number of SCCH to setup (0..3)

S72/SCCH/.

S72/PDCH/nn Change minimum number of PDCH

Command used to reserve a number of timeslots exclusively for

Packet Data. These wil not be pre-empted for voice communication.

Default is 0.

Minimum number of PDCH (00..99)

S72/PDCH/..

S72/FALLBACK/s Change Fallback Mode Indication

Changes Fallback Mode indication to the mobiles

If activated, fallback mode will be indicated status update are not

received from other Nodes.

Fallback mode indicates to mobiles, that full network service are

not available.

Shall be disabled for single-site systems.

Fallback Mode Indication

+: Activate

-: Disable

S72/FALLBACK/.

S72/MSPWR/n Change max. MS TX Power

Max. MS TX Power Level (0..7)

0: Spare

1: +15dBm (30mW)

2: +20dBm (100mW)

3: +25dBm (300mW)

4: +30dBm (1W)

5: +35dBm (3W)

6: +40dBm (10W)

7: +45dBm (30W)

S72/MSPWR/.

Page 56 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/MSACC/nn Change min. MS RX Access Level

Min. MS RX Access Level (0..17)

00: -125dBm

01: -120dBm

02: -115dBm

03: -110dBm

04: -105dBm

05: -100dBm

06: -95dBm

07: -90dBm

..:

15: -50dBm

S72/MSACC/..

S72/ACCPAR/nn Radio Access Parameter

Controls when the mobile starts to reduce its output power at high

received signal strength.

For a 1W mobile, output power will start to decrease at -67dBm input

signal strength with the default setting.

Radio Access Parameter

00: -53dBm

01: -51dBm

02: -49dBm

03: -47dBm

04: -45dBm

05: -43dBm

06: -41dBm

07: -39dBm

08: -37dBm (Default)

09: -35dBm

10: -33dBm

11: -31dBm

12: -29dBm

13: -27dBm

14: -25dBm

15: -23dBm

S72/ACCPAR/..

Page 57 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/DLTO/nn Change Radio Downlink Timeout

Radio Downlink Timeout

00: Disabled

01: 144 timeslot

02: 288 timeslot

03: 432 timeslot

04: 576 timeslot

05: 720 timeslot

06: 864 timeslot

07: 1008 timeslot

08: 1152 timeslot (Default)

09: 1296 timeslot

10: 1440 timeslot

11: 1584 timeslot

12: 1728 timeslot

13: 1872 timeslot

14: 2016 timeslot

15: 2160 timeslot

S72/DLTO/..

S72/CONNTIMEOUT/n Change Connection Timeout

Controls the timeout Tetra Mobile LA Registration

LA Registration Timeout

0: Disabled

1: 10 min.

2: 30 min.

3: 1 hour

4: 2 hour

5: 4 hour

6: 8 hour

7: 24 hour

S72/CONNTIMEOUT/.

Page 58 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/CLASS/ss... Change Subscriber Class

See also Subscriber Class in Profile register

Default value is all enabled

Class 1 (+,-)

Class 2 (+,-)

Class 3 (+,-)

Class 4 (+,-)

Class 5 (+,-)

Class 6 (+,-)

Class 7 (+,-)

Class 8 (+,-)

Class 9 (+,-)

Class 10 (+,-)

Class 11 (+,-)

Class 12 (+,-)

Class 13 (+,-)

Class 14 (+,-)

Class 15 (+,-)

Class 16 (+,-)

1234567890122456

S72/CLASS/................

S72/AIE/s Change Air Interface Encryption activation

Air Interface Encryption

+: Activate

-: Deactivate

S72/AIE/.

S72/NCSYNC/c Change Neighbour Cell Synchronization

Controls the reported Neighbour Cell Synchronization for the Node

Used of Mobiles to allow Seamless Handover

Neighbour Cell Synchronization

A: Automatic (GPS sync controlled)

-: No

+: Yes

S72/NCSYNC/.

S72/SRT/nn Change Slow Reselect Threshold above Fast

Slow Reselect Threshold above Fast (00..15)(0..30dB)

S72/SRT/..

S72/FRT/nn Change Fast Reselect Threshold

Fast Reselect Threshold (00..15)(0..30dB)

S72/FRT/..

Page 59 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/SRH/nn Change Slow Reselect Hysteresis

Slow Reselect Hysteresis (00..15)(0..30dB)

S72/SRH/..

S72/FRH/nn Change Fast Reselect Hysteresis

Fast Reselect Hysteresis (00..15)(0..30dB)

S72/FRH/..

S72/TR Display Tetra TR Configuration

S72/TR

S72/TR/AUTO/s Change Tetra Auto Convert Flag

This flag controls auto conversion between Tetra Primitives and Frequencies.

Normally either Tetra Primitives or Frequencies are entered per TR.

If an ETSI defined relationship exists, the other will be setup automatically.

For non-ETSI defined relations both parameters can be setup independently.

For special systems using ETSI defined primitives in a non-standardized way,

turning off this flag allows independent setup of Tetra Primitives and

Frequencies in a non-ETSI compatible way.

When setting the Flag, all frequencies will be recalculated from the Tetra

primitives.

+: Automatic Primitives<->Frequencies conversion (default)

-: Independent Primitives and Frequencies

S72/TR/AUTO/.

Page 60 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/TR/BI/nn/n/n/s Change Tetra Band Info for all TR

NB: This also changes the Frequencies if valid conversion exists!

Frequency Band (0..15)

03: 300MHZ

04: 400MHz

08: 800MHz

Offset (0..3)

0: 0kHz

1: +6.25kHz

2: -6.25kHz

3: +12.5kHz

Duplex Spacing (0..7)

FB=1: 0: 1.6MHz

1: 4.5MHz

2: 0MHz

FB=2: 0: 10MHz

2: 0MHz

FB=3: 0: 10MHz

1: 36MHz

2: 0MHz

3: 8MHz

4: 18MHz

FB=4: 0: 10MHz

1: 7MHz

2: 0MHz

3: 8MHz

4: 5MHz

5: 9.5MHz

FB=5: 0: 10MHz

2: 0MHz

FB=6: 0: 10MHz

2: 0MHz

4: 30MHz

FB=7: 2: 0MHz

4: 30MHz

FB=8: 1: 45MHz

2: 0MHz

3: 18MHz

FB=9: 1: 45MHz

2: 0MHz

3: 18MHz

4: 39MHz

Reverse Operation

-: Normal Operation (BS TX higher than BS RX)

+: Reverse Operation (BS TX lower than BS RX)

S72/TR/BI/../././.

Page 61 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/TR/nn/FREQ/... Change Tetra TR Frequencies

NB: This also changes the Tetra Primitives if valid conversion exists!

TR Address (11..48)

RX Frequency

TX Frequency

S72/TR/../FREQ/........../..........

Page 62 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/TR/nn/BI/... Change Tetra TR Band Info

NB: This also changes the Frequencies if valid conversion exists!

TR Address (11..48)

Frequency Band (0..15)

03: 300MHZ

04: 400MHz

08: 800MHz

Offset (0..3)

0: 0kHz

1: +6.25kHz

2: -6.25kHz

3: +12.5kHz

Duplex Spacing (0..7)

FB=1: 0: 1.6MHz

1: 4.5MHz

2: 0MHz

FB=2: 0: 10MHz

2: 0MHz

FB=3: 0: 10MHz

1: 36MHz

2: 0MHz

3: 8MHz

4: 18MHz

FB=4: 0: 10MHz

1: 7MHz

2: 0MHz

3: 8MHz

4: 5MHz

5: 9.5MHz

FB=5: 0: 10MHz

2: 0MHz

FB=6: 0: 10MHz

2: 0MHz

4: 30MHz

FB=7: 2: 0MHz

4: 30MHz

FB=8: 1: 45MHz

2: 0MHz

3: 18MHz

FB=9: 1: 45MHz

2: 0MHz

3: 18MHz

4: 39MHz

Reverse Operation

-: Normal Operation (BS TX higher than BS RX)

+: Reverse Operation (BS TX lower than BS RX)

S72/TR/../BI/../././.

Page 63 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S72/TR/nn/CN/... Change Tetra TR Carrier Number

NB: This also changes the Frequencies if valid conversion exists!

TR Address (11..48)

Carrier Number:

0000..3999: Tetra Carrier Number

---- : Clear Carrier Number

S72/TR/../CN/....

S72/NC Display Tetra Neighbour Cell configuration list

S72/NC

S72/NC/+ Activate Tetra Neighbour Cell configuration list

Only active Cells from the list will be included in Neighbour Cell broadcast

This shall be selected for bigger systems

S72/NC/+

S72/NC/- De-activate Tetra Neighbour Cell List

All active Cells will be included in Neighbour Cell broadcast

This is for small systems only!

S72/NC/-

S72/NC/nnn/+ Add Tetra Neighbour Cell to list

Node Number (001..NodeMax)

S72/NC/.../+

S72/NC/nnn/- Remove Tetra Neighbour Cell from list

Node Number (001..NodeMax)

S72/NC/.../-

Page 64 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Voice Gateway configuration:

S73 Display Voice Gateway configuration

S73

S73/CNFG/+ Activate Voice Gateway

Only possible if allowed of License Dongle

S73/CNFG/+

S73/CNFG/- Deactivate Voice Gateway

S73/CNFG/-

S73/ORG/ccc Change Voice Gateway Organization Number

000 : Calls allowed to/from all Home Organizations

001..999: Calls restricted to/from this Home Organization

+++ : Activates use of Organization Number Prefix

Outgoing: 3-digit Prefix is added to B-number.

Call from all Organizations are allowed.

Incoming: 3-digit Prefix shall be present on B-number.

Calls restricted to Prefix Home Organization (All

for 000)

Incoming Prefix is deleted.

S73/ORG/...

S73/CALLMAX/nnn Change max. number of Voice Gateway calls

Used to reduce the maximum number of simultaneous Voice Gateway

calls to less than defined in the License Dongle.

The value is limited to the License Dongle value.

Max. simultaneous calls (001..999)

S73/CALLMAX/...

S73/PRIORITY/nn Change PABX->Tetra Call Priority

Priority of the Tetra call at call setup from PSTN

Call Priority (00..15)

S73/PRIORITY/..

S73/REG/s Change Voice Gateway Registration Selection

Activates the use of SIP registration to the remote PABX/Gateway

It is recommended to use registration

+: Use SIP registration (default)

-: Do not use SIP registration

S73/REG/.

Page 65 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

S73/NAME/cc..c Change Voice Gateway Registration Name

Name to use for Registration on remote PABX/Gateway

Name (0..64 characters)

S73/NAME/................................................................

S73/PASSWORD/cc..c Change Voice Gateway Registration Name

Name to use for Registration on remote PABX/Gateway

Password (0..32 characters)

S73/PASSWORD/................................

S73/IPADDR/... Change Voice Gateway Remote IP Address

IP Address of the PABX or SIP proxy conneced to the BSC

IP address

S73/IPADDR/...............

S73/PORT/LOC/nnnnn Change Voice Gateway Local IP Port

Defalut value is 05060

Local IP Port (00001..65535)

S73/PORT/LOC/.....

S73/PORT/REM/nnnnn Change Voice Gateway Remote IP Port

Defalut value is 05060

Remote IP Port (00001..65535)

S73/PORT/REM/.....

Page 66 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Packet Data Gateway configuration:

S74 Display Packet Data Gateway configuration

S74

S74/CNFG/+ Activate Packet Data Gateway

Only possible if allowed of License Dongle

S74/CNFG/+

S74/CNFG/- Deactivate Packet Data Gateway

S74/CNFG/-

S74/RIP/s Change Packet Data Gateway RIP selection

Controls output of Routing Information Protocol ver. 2 according

to RFC2453.

If activated, RIP message with IP Address and Mask will be

send every 30 second to multicast address 224.0.0.9 UDP port 520.

To be received of the default gateway for the IP segment, where

RIPv2 shall be activated.

When RIP is activated, a static route in the default gateway

pointing to the Packet Data Gateway is no longer needed.

Note, that RIP is needed for switching between redundant BSC's.

+: Activate RIPv2 output (default)

-: Disable RIPv2 output

S74/RIP/.

Page 67 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Application Gateway configuration:

S75 Display Application Gateway configuration

S75

S75/CNFG/+ Activate Application Gateway

Only possible if allowed of License Dongle

S75/CNFG/+

S75/CNFG/- Deactivate Application Gateway

S75/CNFG/-

S75/CONNMAX/nnn Change max. Application Gateway connections

Used to reduce the maximum number of simultaneous connected Applications to a

lower value as the limit in the License Dongle.

The value is automatically limited to the lowest of the compiled

maximum value and the License Dongle value.

Max. Application Gateway connections (001..999)

S75/CONNMAX/...

S75/STREAMMAX/nnn Change max. Application Gateway Circuit Mode Streams

Used to reduce the maximum total number of simultaneous Circuit Mode

streams for the Application Gateway to lower value than the compiled maximum.

The value is automatically limited to the compiled maximum.

Max. Application Gateway Circuit Mode Streams (001..999)

S75/STREAMMAX/...

S75/CONNTIMEOUT/nnn Connection Timeout

Timeout for the Application connection.

Used to timeout connection at missing Application response.

Default value is 2 minutes.

Connection Timeout (001..255 [minutes])

S75/CONNTIMEOUT/...

S75/DISCRLIST/s Change Application Gateway Discreet Listening

Controls Discreet Listening activation in Application Gateway

+: Activate Discreet Listening support

-: Disable Discreet Listening support (default)

S75/DISCRLIST/.

Page 68 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Terminal Gateway configuration:

S76 Display Terminal Gateway configuration

S76

S76/CNFG/+ Activate Terminal Gateway

Only possible if allowed of License Dongle

S76/CNFG/+

S76/CNFG/- Deactivate Terminal Gateway

S76/CNFG/-

S76/CONNMAX/nnn Change max. Terminal Gateway connections

Used to reduce the maximum number of simultaneous connected Terminals to a

lower value as the limit in the License Dongle.

The value is automatically limited to the lowest of the compiled

maximum value and the License Dongle value.

Max. Terminal Gateway connections (001..999)

S76/CONNMAX/...

S76/STREAMMAX/nnn Change max. Terminal Gateway Circuit Mode Streams

Used to reduce the maximum total number of simultaneous Circuit Mode

streams for the Terminal Gateway to lower value than the compiled maximum.

The value is automatically limited to the compiled maximum.

Max. Terminal Gateway Circuit Mode Streams (001..999)

S76/STREAMMAX/...

S76/CONNTIMEOUT/nnn Connection Timeout

Timeout for the Terminal connection.

Used to timeout connection at missing Terminal response.

Default value is 2 minutes.

Connection Timeout (001..255 [minutes])

S76/CONNTIMEOUT/...

Page 69 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description

Page 1 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BS Address selection

Page 2 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSC41x UART Address selection

AU BSC41x UART ADDRESS SELECTION

AU Display BSC41x UART selection

AU

AU+ Select BSC41x UART Address

AU+

AU- Deselect BSC41x UART Address

AU-

AU/FORCED Forced BSC41x UART Address select

Warning: This will disconnect existing user!!!

AU/FORCED

Command description:

Page 3 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Device Address selection

A DEVICE ADDRESS COMMAND

A Display Address

NB: If BSC41x UART is selected, command is send on UART

and response is coming from selected Device

A

Ann Select BS41x TR Address

TR Address

11..48: TR11..TR48 Transceiver

A..

APnn Select BS41x PS Address

PS Address

11..47: PS11..PS47 Power Supply

AP..

ATnn Select BS41x TC Address

TC Address

11..42: TC11..TC12 TX Combiner

AT..

Command description:

Page 4 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Software Version:

H00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

H00 Display software version

H00

H00/A Display all software version numbers

H00/A

H00/C Display compiler options

H00/C

H00/OM Display OM TCP Connection status

H00/OM

H00/BSC Display OM BSC Connection status

H00/BSC

Command description:

Page 5 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BS Activation Control

H02 BS ACTIVATION CONTROL

H02 Display BS Activation Status

H02

H02/ACTIVATE BS Activation Request

Sends Activation Request to other BS

H02/ACTIVATE

H02/STANDBY/s Change Forced BSC Standby

+: Forced Standby

-: Normal

H02/STANDBY/.

Command description:

Page 6 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Alarms

H03 ALARMS

H03 Display BS Alarm state

H03

H03/A Display BSC Alarm Flags

H03/A

H03/IN Display Alarm Inputs

H03/IN

Command description:

Page 7 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Synchronization Status

H12 SYNCHRONIZATION STATUS

H12 Display Synchronization Status

H12

H12/IN Display Sync Inputs

H12/IN

H12/MASTER Display Master Table

H12/MASTER

H12/PPS Display 1PPS Inputs

H12/PPS

H12/HIST Display OCXO Sync History

H12/HIST

Command description:

Page 8 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BS Antenna Status

H13 BS ANTENNA STATUS

H13 Display Radio Cell Antenna Status

H13

Command description:

Page 9 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TR Status

H15 TR STATUS

H15 Display TR Status

H15

H15/c Display TR Status

F: Frequencies/Power

P: GPS Positions

V: Versions

L: Frequency and Power Limits

E: External Alarms

H15/.

H15/nn/A Display TR Alarm Flags

TR Address (11..48)

H15/../A

Command description:

Page 10 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

PS Status

H16 PS STATUS

H16 Display PS Status

H16

H16/AL Display PS411 Alarm Flags

H16/AL

H16/REC Display PS411 Rectifier status

H16/REC

H16/OUT Display PS411 +14V/+26V status

H16/OUT

H16/LED Display PS411 LED status

H16/LED

H16/nn Display PS411 Status

PS Address (11..47)

H16/..

Command description:

Page 11 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

OCXO:

H31 OCXO SYNC

H31 Display OCXO Sync

H31

H31/IN/c Change Sync Input selection

-: Auto Select

F: Forced Free Running

G: Forced GPS RX Lock

0: Forced External 0 Lock

1: Forced External 1 Lock

2: Forced External 2 Lock

H31/IN/.

H31/SET Set OCXO Free Run adjust value to current DAC value

H31/SET

H31/SET/nn.nnn Set OCXO Free Run value

00.000 to 99.999 [%]

H31/SET/......

H31/SAVE Save OCXO Free Run adjust value in Flash

H31/SAVE

H31/STEP/nn.nnn Simulate a PLL Frequency Step

00.000 to 99.999 [%]

H31/STEP/......

Command description:

Page 12 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Internal GPS RX:

H32 INTERNAL GPS

H32 Display Internal GPS RX Status

H32

H32/VER Display GPS Module Version

H32/VER

H32/N Display next Internal GPS message

Hint: Use the C/H32/N command to display continuously

H32/N

H32/SETUP Setup GPS RX Module

Setup the Internal GPS RX Module and saves the configuration in GPS RX flash

This command shall be executed when a new GPS RX module is installed

H32/SETUP

H32/SEND/cc..c Send Command to GPS RX Module

This command is for testing only

NMEA command

H32/SEND/....................................................................

Command description:

Page 13 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

CMoIP Switch

H34 CMOIP SWITCH

H34 Display all CMoIP Connections

H34

H34/nn/n Display one CMoIP Connection

TR Address (11..48)

Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

H34/../.

H34/nn/n/... CMoIP Multicast Connect

TR Address (11..48)

Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

Multicast IP Address

H34/.././...............

H34/nn/n/REL CMoIP Multicast Release

TR Address (11..48)

Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

H34/.././REL

H34/C Clear Message Counters

H34/C

Command description:

Page 14 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Message Trace:

H48 MESSAGE TRACE

H48 Display Message Trace

H48

H48- Stop all Message Traces

H48-

H48/C Clear Trace Counters

H48/C

H48/UDP/+ Activate Trace output to UDP

UDP output counter will be cleared

H48/UDP/+

H48/UDP/- Stop Trace output to UDP

H48/UDP/-

H48/UDP/nnn... Change Trace UDP address+port

UDP IP address

UDP port number (default 42397)

H48/UDP/.............../.....

H48/FILE/+ Open Trace output file

File will be cleared if existing

File output counter will be cleared

H48/FILE/+

H48/FILE/- Close Trace output file

H48/FILE/-

H48/FILE/cc..c Change Trace filename

File will be closed if open

NB: There shall be write access permission to the file location

Filename (e.g. C:\Tetra\Work\Trace1.lan)

H48/FILE/.........................................................

H48/n/s Start/Stop Trace

Trace Number (1..4)

Action

+: Start Trace

-: Stop Trace

H48/./.

Page 15 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

H48/n/nn/n/c Setup Trace Test Point

Trace Number (1..4)

TR (11..18)

Timeslot (1..4)

Test Point

U: Unencrypted

E: Encrypted (unencrypted if no AIE)

H48/./.././.

Command description:

The H48 Commands control the TR Signalling Trace functionality.

Up to 4 different Test Points can be activated on any TR and timeslot in total.

Both Downlink and Uplink traffic is monitored on the TR's, and excludes or

includes

Air Interface Encryption.

The output from the Test Points can be output realtime in UDP messages, and can

also be written to a file, either located locally or on a remote Computer.

The output can be analyzed with the Tetra Protocol Analyzer from fjord-e-

design.

Page 16 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Tetra Channel Test:

H49 TETRA CHANNEL TEST

H49 Display Tetra channel test selection

H49

H49/c Change Sync Mode

A: PRBS Auto Sync

M: PRBS Forced Multiframe Sync

T: PRBS Forced Timeslot Sync

H49/.

H49/n Change Sync Output Frequency

1: 1 second

2: 17 second (TDMA frame start)

3: 51 second (Multiframe start)

H49/.

H49/nn/n/nn Select Logical Channel to evaluate

TR Address (11..48)

Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

Uplink test point channel types:

07: TCH/7.2

08: SCH/F

09: STCH

10: TCH/2.4 N=1

11: SCH/HU

16: TCH/S

18: TCH/4.8 N=1

Downlink test point channel types:

57: TCH/7.2

60: TCH/2.4 N=1

66: TCH/S

68: TCH/4.8 N=1

H49/.././..

H49/CNTR Display Counters

H49/CNTR

H49/CLEAR Clear Counter Values

H49/CLEAR

H49/DATA Display data from TR

H49/DATA

Command description:

The H49 commands controls the build-in TETRA channel test features.

Page 17 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

When channel test is activated, a test point at the output from or input to

the receiver is selected. Received bursts including status will be analyzed

and BER/MER calculated.

When channel test is activated, the BS421 TX switches to uplink mode and

generates the selected channel type. When TX is keyed and RFTL activated,

an RX input signal can be generated for the testing.

Alternatively, a test signal can be generated from an external source, e.g.

an R&S SMIQ or Anritsu signal generator

The uplink test point is intended for normal receiver channel tests.

The downlink test point is intented for test of received traffic from the

lines.

Page 18 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

DC Voltmeter

H60 DC VOLTMETER

H60 Display DC Voltmeter

H60

Command description:

Page 19 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Co-Processor

*H61 CO-PROCESSOR

H61 Display Co-Processor Status

H61

H61/Fhhh0 Display DPRAM

DPRAM Address (F8000..FFFF0)

H61/F...0

H61/MEM/hhhhh Read CP Memory

CP Memory Address (00000..FFFFF)

H61/MEM/.....

H61/PORT/hhhhh Read CP Port

CP Port Address (0000..FFFF)

H61/PORT/....

Command description:

Page 20 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BS<->BSC Message test queue

H63 BS<->BSC MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

H63 Display BSC Link Status

H63

H63/N Display next BSC message

H63/N

H63/N+ Display next BSC message extended

H63/N+

H63/S Set BSC message test queue to start

H63/S

H63/C Clear BSC message test queue

H63/C

H63/s BSC Message suppression

+: Display all BSC messages

-: Suppress some BSC messages (default)

H63/.

H63/n/hh/hh..hh Send Message to BSC

BSC Number (1..2)

Message ID (00..FF hex)

Payload (hex)

0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

H63/./../......................................................................

Command description:

Page 21 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

UDP Message test queue

H64 UDP MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

H64 Display UDP Link Status

H64

H64/N Display next UDP message

H64/N

H64/N+ Display next UDP message extended

H64/N+

H64/S Set UDP message test queue to start

H64/S

H64/C Clear UDP message test queue

H64/C

H64/s UDP Message suppression

+: Display all UDP messages

-: Suppress some UDP messages (default)

H64/.

H64/hh/hh..hh Send Message to Redundant BS

Message ID (00..FF hex)

Payload (hex)

0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

H64/../......................................................................

Command description:

Page 22 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BS<->TR Message test queue

H65 BS<->TR MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

H65 Display TR Link Status

H65

H65/PS Display PS411 Link Status

H65/PS

H65/N Display next TR message

H65/N

H65/N+ Display next TR message extended

H65/N+

H65/S Set TR message test queue to start

H65/S

H65/C Clear TR message test queue

H65/C

H65/s TR Message suppression

+: Display all TR messages

-: Suppress some TR messages (default)

H65/.

H65/nn/hh/hh..hh Send Message to TR

TR Address (11..48)

Message ID (00..FF hex)

Payload (hex)

0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

34

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

H65/../../.....................................................................

.

H65/PS/nn/hh/hh..hh Send Message to PS411

PS Address (11..47)

Message ID (00..FF hex)

Payload (hex)

0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

34

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

H65/PS/../../..................................................................

....

Command description:

Page 23 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Program Download

H68 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

H68 Display Program Download Status

H68

H68/TR412 Display TR412 Program Download Status

Command only available on active BSC

H68/TR412

H68/TR412/cc TR412 Program Download command

1) Sends Program Download command to TR412

2) TR412 restarts in Boot Mode, erases the flash program area

and sends download request to BSC.

3) BSC reads ...\Pgm\TR412\TR412.bin file from disk

4) BSC starts download to reprogram TR412 Flash

5) TR412 restarts again and resumes normal operation

NB: Boot Part of TR412 software is NOT updated.

Boot version can be displayed with the TR412 '00/A' command.

Command only available on active BSC

A : All TR

11..48: TR11..TR48

H68/TR412/..

Command description:

Page 24 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BS configuration:

H70 Display command function

H70

H70/SAVE Save BS configuration in file

Note that BS Configuration changes are saved automatically

H70/SAVE

Page 25 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Common system configuration:

H71 Display Common BS configuration

H71

H71/CNFG/+ Activate BS

H71/CNFG/+

H71/CNFG/- Deactivate BS

H71/CNFG/-

H71/BSNO/n Change BS Number

BS Number (1..2)

H71/BSNO/.

H71/RACKNO/n Change Rack Number

Rack number (1st digit of Address)

Rack Number (1..4)

H71/RACKNO/.

H71/REDBS/s Change Redundant BS Configuration

Redundant BS Configuration Flag

+: Configured

-: Not configured

H71/REDBS/.

H71/REDBS/... Change Redundant BS IP Address

IP Address

H71/REDBS/...............

H71/BSC/n/s Change BSC Configuration

BSC number (1..2)

BSC Configuration Flag

+: Select BSC

-: Deselect BSC

H71/BSC/./.

H71/BSC/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Change BSC IP Address

BSC number (1..2)

IP Address

H71/BSC/./...............

H71/CMOIP Display CMoIP selection

NB: Command not available in Damm TetraFlex

H71/CMOIP

Page 26 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

H71/CMOIP/s Change CMoIP selection

NB: Command not available in Damm TetraFlex

CMoIP Selection

-: CMoIP Multicast

+: CMoIP to BSS

H71/CMOIP/.

H71/CMOIP/n/... Change CMoIP BSS IP Address

NB: Command not available in Damm TetraFlex

Active BSS number (1..2)

IP Address

H71/CMOIP/./...............

Page 27 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Synchronization configurations

H72 Synchronisation

H72 Display BSC412 Sync selection

H72

H72/MASTER/c Change Master Priority

Changes the Synchronization Priority for the BS

Master 1 shall be selected for the Primary Master in a cell.

Master 2..4 shall be selected for the Backup Masters in a cell.

Master 0 shall only be selected if the BS is Global Master used to

synchronize other cells.

Warning: The Master selections shall be unique within a Radio Cell

0: Master 0 (For Global Master) (Highest Priority)

1: Master 1 (For Primary Master in a Cell)

2: Master 2

3: Master 3

4: Master 4 (Lowest Priority)

S: Slave

H72/MASTER/.

H72/CENTSECOFS/snnnnnnnnnn Change Century Second offset

Used to change the Century Second offset, where all TETRA counters started

For standard Damm TetraFlex this value shall be 0.

Century Second Offset

DAMM: +0000000000 [2000-01-01 00:00:00 UTC]

EADS: +0031536013 [1999-01-01 00:00:00 GPS]

H72/CENTSECOFS/...........

H72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM Change Century Second offset to DAMM

Used to clear Century Seconds offset for DAMM timing

Value: 0 for 2000-01-01 00:00:00 UTC

H72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM

H72/CENTSECOFS/EADS Change Century Second offset to EADS

Used to setup the Centrury Seconds offset for EADS timing

Value: +31536013 (1 year + 13 leap seconds) for 1999-01-01 00:00:00 GPS

H72/CENTSECOFS/EADS

H72/GPSRXOFS/snnn.n Change GPS RX offset

Used to change the GPS RX time offset

For standard Damm TetraFlex this value shall be 0.

GPS RX offset

DAMM: +000.0 [usec.]

EADS: +111.1 [usec.]

H72/GPSRXOFS/......

Page 28 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

H72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM Change GPS RX offset to DAMM

Used to clear the GPS RX offset for DAMM timing

Value: +000.0 userc.

H72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM

H72/GPSRXOFS/EADS Change GPS RX offset to EADS

Used to setup the GPS RX offset for EADS timing

Value: -055.6 usec.

H72/GPSRXOFS/EADS

H72/IN/n/s Activate/Deactivate BSC412 Sync Input

Input

G: GPS RX

0: Ext. 0 (Other BSC)

1: Ext. 1

2: Ext. 2

Activate/Deactivate

+: Configured

-: Not configured

H72/IN/./.

H72/IN/n/... Setup BSC412 External Sync Input

Input

1: External 1

2: External 2

Primary Flag

-: Not Primary Input (Normal)

+: Primary Input (For Remote Primary Reference only)

IP Address

Cable Delay in usec. (000.0..999.9)

H72/IN/././.............../.....

H72/OUT Display BSC412 Sync Message Output Table

H72/OUT

H72/OUT/... Add/Remove BSC412 Sync Message Output

All units connected to the 1PPS output shall be added here

Max. 30 IP Addresses can be configured

Outputs are NOT active if Sync Slave Priority

IP Address (000..255)

Action:

+: Add

-: Remove

H72/OUT/.............../.

Command description:

The TETRA Base Station TR's need to be time synchronized to operate correctly.

Most importantly, all TR's in a radio cell shall be time synchronized together

Page 29 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

to

ensure correct timing for the mobiles, when switching from the control channel

to

a traffic channel on another TR.

For a multi-cell systems, all radio cells are also recommended to be time

synchronized together

to enable use of seamless handover (cell re-selection).

The Damm BS system is provided with a flexible system to provide

synchronization

between individual Transceivers. Build-in GPS Receivers give absolute time

synchronization to the radio cells. External Inputs can also be marked as

Primary

Sync References.

When as BS is Network locked, automatic frequency correction of the Master

Oscillator (RX and TX carrier frequencies) are provided, and Seamless Handover

to

other Network Synchronized Cells are activated.

The BS can be setup to run as either Sync Master 0..4 or Slave. The Masters

shall preferably be provided with GPS antennas or an External Primary Sync

source.

The remaining BS's shall be setup as Slave and do not need a GPS antenna.

The BS is provided with one External 1PPS (1 Pulse Per Second) output and

three external 1PPS inputs. The Slaves shall have their external 1PPS inputs

connected to Masters.

In addition to the hardware 1PPS, sync messages are send every second on IP

from the Masters to attached BS's.

A Master will indicate Master Mode, if:

1) Synchronized to the internal GPS RX or

2) Synchronized to an External Input marked as Primary and indicating

Master Mode

Master 0 priority:

1) Int. GPS RX

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 1, Resync-only

7) Ext. Master 2, Resync-only

8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only

9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only

10)Int. Free-Run

Master 1 priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Int. GPS RX

Page 30 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 2, Resync-only

8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only

9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only

10)Int. Free-Run

Master 2 priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Int. GPS RX

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 1

8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only

9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only

10)Int. Free-Run

Master 3 priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

4) Int. GPS RX

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 1

8) Ext. Master 2

9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only

10)Int. Free-Run

Master 4 priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Int. GPS RX

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 1

8) Ext. Master 2

9) Ext. Master 3

10)Int. Free-Run

Slave priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 1

8) Ext. Master 2

Page 31 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

9) Ext. Master 3

10)Ext. Master 4

11)Int. GPS RX

12)Int. Free-Run

If no GPS synchronized Master or higher prioritized free-running Master is

available at re-start, Masters will try initially to synchronize to lower

prioritized free-running Masters.

A BS will resync automatically after a short time, if Century Second

and Phase Detector are out of sync with a valid sync source.

Masters shall be setup even if GPS antennas are not used and internal GPS RX

are deselected, to ensure proper synchronization between all TR's.

Typical BS41x configuration without redundant BSC412:

BS activated on BSC412: Sync Master 1

Typical BS41x configuration with redundant BSC412:

BSC412-11: Sync Master 1

BSC412-12: Sync Master 2

Typical dual-rack BS41x configuration with redundant BSC412 in each rack:

BSC412-11: Sync Master 1

BSC412-12: Sync Master 2

BSC412-21: Sync Master 3

BSC412-22: Sync Master 4

Page 32 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Radio Cell configuration

H73 Display Radio Cell configuration

H73

H73/RXDIV/c Change RX Diversity configuration

RX diversity configuration

D: Diversity

A: RX-A antenna only

B: RX-B antenna only

H73/RXDIV/.

H73/RXPREGAIN/n.n Change RX Pre-Gain

TMA pregain in dB (0.0..9.9, nom. 6.0)

H73/RXPREGAIN/...

H73/RXBAND/... Change RX frequency band

Define the RX frequency band of the cell

Shall match the TMA filter adjustment

RX low frequency

nnn.nnnnnn: Frequency [MHz]

000.000000: Not setup

RX high frequency

nnn.nnnnnn: Frequency [MHz]

000.000000: Not setup

H73/RXBAND/........../..........

H73/TXBAND/... Change TX frequency band

Define the TX frequency band of the cell

Shall match the TX filter adjustment

TX low frequency

nnn.nnnnnn: Frequency [MHz]

000.000000: Not setup

TX high frequency

nnn.nnnnnn: Frequency [MHz]

000.000000: Not setup

H73/TXBAND/........../..........

H73/TXANT/... Change TX antenna alarm settings

TX antenna L1 alarm setting (06..16 [dB Return Loss])

TX antenna L2 alarm setting (06..16 [dB Return Loss])

Minimum forward power (0.2..9.9 [W])

Minimum reflected power (0.01..0.99 [W])

H73/TXANT/../../.../0...

Page 33 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Power Supply configuration

H74 Display PS411 Power Supply configuration

H74

H74/AC/s Change PS411 AC Input selection

AC input

+: AC input provided

-: No AC input provided (Mains missing alarm suppressed)

H74/AC/.

H74/CHARGE/s Change PS411 Battery Charging selection

NB: This is only significant, if AC Input is selected

Battery charging

+: Battery charging used

-: No Battery charging

H74/CHARGE/.

H74/CHGVOLT/nn.n Change PS411 Charging Voltage

NB: This is only significant, if AC Input and Charging is selected

Charging voltage at 25 Celsius in Volt (52.8..55.2)

H74/CHGVOLT/....

H74/CHGCOMP/nnn Change PS411 Charging Compensation

NB: This is only significant, if AC Input and Charging is selected

Charging temperature compensation (48..120) [-mV/C]

H74/CHGCOMP/...

Page 34 of 34Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Software Versions:

00 SOFTWARE VERSIONS

00 Display Welcome Message

00

00/A Display all software versions

00/A

00/C Display compiler options

00/C

00/OM Display OM TCP connections

00/OM

00+ Open GUI Console Window

00+

Command description:

Page 1 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Gateway Connection:

01 Display Gateways Connection Status

01

01/L Display Gateway Status List

01/L

01/+ Gateway reconnect request

Request Gateway reconnect

For Auto, next in list will be tried

01/+

01/C Clear Gateway errors

01/C

01/A Auto Gateway select

01/A

01/n Forced Gateway select

Gateway Number (0..9)

01/.

Page 2 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

License Dongle:

04 LICENSE DONGLE

04 Display License Dongle Settings

Displays the settings read from dongle at application startup

04

04/I Display License Dongle Info

Displays the info read from dongle at application startup

04/I

04/D Display License Dongle Memory in Decimal

Displays the info read from dongle at application startup

04/D

04/H Display License Dongle Memory in Hex

Displays the info read from dongle at application startup

04/H

Command description:

Page 3 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Node Status:

10 Display Nodes

10

10/c Display Node Status

S: Subscriber Register

C: Coordinates (Positions)

R: Radio Cell

V: Voice Gateway

P: Packet Date Gateway

R: Application Gateway

10/.

Page 4 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Subscriber Register:

20 Display Subscriber Register

20

20/RELOAD Subscriber Register reload from Gateway

20/RELOAD

20/CHECK Subscriber Register consistency check

20/CHECK

20/QUE Display Subscriber Register Queues

20/QUE

Page 5 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Profile Register:

21 Display Profile Register Status

21

21/nnnn Display Profile

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/....

21/L/nnnn/snn/nn Display Profile list

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..50)

21/L/..../.../..

21/nnnn/ADD/nnn/cc..c Add/Change Profile

Command to Add or Change Profile

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Home Organization

nnn: 000..999 (0=All)

---: Home Organization of Application

Description

21/..../ADD/.../........................

21/nnnn/ASSORG Display Associated Organizations

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../ASSORG

21/nnnn/ASSORG/s Change use of Associated Organizations

Activates/deactivates the use of Associated Organizations

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Associated Organizations

+: Activate

-: Deactivate

21/..../ASSORG/.

21/nnnn/ASSORG/nnn/s Add/Remove Associated Organization

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Associated Organization Number (001..999)

Action

+: Add

-: Remove

21/..../ASSORG/.../.

Page 6 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/SSICALL/s Setup SSI Call Permission

Selects whether Individual Calls are allowed with SSI

If not selected, Individual Calls are only allowed wit User Number

Profile Number (0000..9999)

+: Allow Individual Calls with SSI

-: Only allow Individual Calls with User Number

21/..../SSICALL/.

21/nnnn/SSIGROUP/s Use SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group Calls

Selects the use of SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group Calls

to bypass the bug in certain mobiles (Motorola)

NB: This flag affects only GSSI's attached to the Profile (not ISSI)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

+: Use SSI as TPI for Group Call

-: Use User Number as TPI for Group Call (default)

21/..../SSIGROUP/.

21/nnnn/SECMODE/n Setup Security Mode

For optional modes, service will be allowed without Authentication/Air

InterFace encryption, when no Security Set is available or when the SSI

Authentication and Air Interface Encryption disable flags are set.

For mandatory modes, service will only be permitted with full Authentication

and Air Interface Encryption.

Note, that Air Interface Encryption requires, that permission is activated

in the License Dongle.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Mode:

0: Class 1, no Auth./AIE

1: Class 1, Auth. optional, AIE none

2: Class 1, Auth. mandatory, AIE none

3: Class 3, Aut. optional, AIE optional

4: Class 3, Auth. mandatory, AIE mandatory

21/..../SECMODE/.

21/nnnn/SECKSG/nn Setup Key Stream Generator

Used with Air Interface Encryption only

Note, that the TR shall support the selected KSG.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

KSG:

00: TEA1

01: TEA2

02: TEA3

03: TEA4

04..15: Reserved

21/..../SECKSG/..

Page 7 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/SHORTNO/n/nn..n Setup Short Number Format

Specifies Short Number format

When a number with a length of 'Short Number Length' is dialled, the

'Short Number Prefix' is automatically added before the lookup in the

Subscriber Register.

Leading zeroes in the Prefix are not significant.

The sum of 'Short Number Length' and the length of 'Short Number Prefix' may

not exceed 7 digits.

The function has no effect for PSTN calls.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Short Number Length (0..6) (0=Disabled)

Short Number Prefix ("" to "999999")

21/..../SHORTNO/./......

21/nnnn/DISPNO/nnnnnnn Setup Dispatcher User Number

User Number of the Dispatcher used to authorize calls

Leading zeroes are not significant

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Dispatcher User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for disabled)

21/..../DISPNO/.......

21/nnnn/PRIORITY/nn Select Call Priority

Sets the Call Priority

This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from mobiles

Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from mobiles will always be passed unchanged

Mobile controlled Priority is default (see this command)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Call Priority

01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)

06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)

12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)

21/..../PRIORITY/..

21/nnnn/PRIORITY/- Select Mobile controlled Call Priority

Lets the mobile control the Call and PTT Priority

This is the default setting

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../PRIORITY/-

21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/nn.n Set Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout

Sets the time from last PTT released until Individual PTT Call termination.

Default setting is Disabled.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Individuel PTT Call Inactivity timeout

00.0 : Disabled

00.1..25.0: Timeout value [minutes]

21/..../INDIVTIMEOUT/....

Page 8 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/- Disable Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout

Disables timeout of Individual PTT Call.

This is the default setting.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../INDIVTIMEOUT/-

21/nnnn/GROUPTIMEOUT/nn Set Group Call Inactivity Timeout

Changes the time from last PTT is released until the group call

is terminated. Default value is 5 seconds.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Group Call Inactivity timeout (00..20 seconds)

21/..../GROUPTIMEOUT/..

21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/nnn Set max. Call Duration

Sets the maximum call duration of Individual Calls.

The default value is infinity (see this command)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Max Call Duration (001..250 minutes)

21/..../CALLDURMAX/...

21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/- Set Call Duration limit to infinity

Sets the maximum call duration of Individual Calls to infinity.

This is the default setting

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../CALLDURMAX/-

21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/nnn Set max. PTT Duration

Sets the maximun talking period at Simplex Calls

The default value is disabled (Mobile controlled) (see this command)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Max PTT Duration (002..250 seconds)

21/..../PTTDURMAX/...

21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/- Disable PTT Duration limit

Sets the maximun talking period at Simplex Calls to be controlled

of the Mobile.

The system will still limit the time to maximum 310 seconds,

which is longer than the maximum 300 second setting for the mobile.

This is the default setting.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../PTTDURMAX/-

Page 9 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/nn Set Late Entry Timer

Sets the Late Entry Timer.

Controls the duraton between active Group announcements on Control Channel.

The default value is 15 seconds.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Late Entry Timer (05..60 seconds)

21/..../LATEENTRY/..

21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/- Disable Late Entry Timer

Disables Late Entry Timer.

Stops the active Group announcements on Control Channel.

The default value is 15 seconds.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../LATEENTRY/-

21/nnnn/CLASS/M Setup Subscriber Class Mobile controlled

See also Subscriber Class in Node configuration

Mobile controlled is the default setting

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../CLASS/M

21/nnnn/CLASS/ss... Setup Subscriber Class Network controlled

Note, that all - means Mobile controlled

See also Subscriber Class in Node configuration

Mobile controlled is the default setting

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Class 1 (+,-)

Class 2 (+,-)

Class 3 (+,-)

Class 4 (+,-)

Class 5 (+,-)

Class 6 (+,-)

Class 7 (+,-)

Class 8 (+,-)

Class 9 (+,-)

Class 10 (+,-)

Class 11 (+,-)

Class 12 (+,-)

Class 13 (+,-)

Class 14 (+,-)

Class 15 (+,-)

Class 16 (+,-)

1234567890122456

21/..../CLASS/................

Page 10 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/SERVRESTR Display SSI Service Restrictions

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../SERVRESTR

21/nnnn/SERVRESTR/s Change SSI Service Restriction activation

Selects activation/deactivation of all SSI Service Restrictions

Profile Number (0000..9999)

+: Restrictions active according to individual flags

-: All Restrictions disabled (default)

21/..../SERVRESTR/.

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/c Display Service Permission flags

Profile Number (0000..9999)

SSI Kind

M: Mobile SSI

D: Dial-In SSI

A: Application SSI

T: Terminal SSI

21/..../SERVPERM/.

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/nn/c Change Mobile SSI Service Permission flag

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Mobile SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)

00: Individual Duplex Call to Mobile

01: Individual Duplex Call from Mobile

02: Individual Simplex Call to Mobile

03: Individual Simplex Call from Mobile

04: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

05: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

06: Individual Call to Application Gateway

07: Individual Call from Application Gateway

08: Group Call

09: Send SDS

10: Receive Individual SDS

11: Packet Data Call

Flag

+: Service allowed

A: Service allowed with Dispatcher Authorization

(00..07 only)

-: Service not allowed

21/..../SERVPERM/M/../.

Page 11 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/nn/s Change Dial-In SSI Service Permission flag

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Dial-In SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)

06: Group Call

Flag

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

21/..../SERVPERM/D/../.

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/nn/s Change Application SSI Service Permission flag

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Application SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)

00: Individual Call to Mobile

01: Individual Call from Mobile

02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

04: Individual Call to Application Gateway

05: Individual Call from Application Gateway

06: Group Call

07: Send SDS

08: Receive Individual SDS

Flag

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

21/..../SERVPERM/A/../.

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/nn/s Change Terminal SSI Service Permission flag

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Terminal SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)

00: Individual Call to Mobile

01: Individual Call from Mobile

02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

04: Individual Call to Application Gateway

05: Individual Call from Application Gateway

06: Group Call

07: Send SDS

08: Receive Individual SDS

Flag

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

21/..../SERVPERM/T/../.

Page 12 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/cc..c Change all Mobile SSI Service Permission flags

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Mobile SSI Service Permission Flags:

+: Service allowed

A: Service allowed with Dispatcher Authorization (00..07

only)

-: Service not allowed

00: Individual Duplex Call to Mobile

01: Individual Duplex Call from Mobile

02: Individual Simplex Call to Mobile

03: Individual Simplex Call from Mobile

04: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

05: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

06: Individual Call to Application Gateway

07: Individual Call from Application Gateway

08: Group Call

09: Send SDS

10: Receive Individual SDS

11: Packet Data Call

12: (Spare)

13: (Spare)

14: (Spare)

15: (Spare)

21/..../SERVPERM/M/................

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/ss..s Change all Dial-In SSI Service Permission flags

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Dial-In SSI Service Permission Flags:

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

00: (Spare)

01: (Spare)

02: (Spare)

03: (Spare)

04: (Spare)

05: (Spare)

06: Group Call

07: (Spare)

08: (Spare)

09: (Spare)

10: (Spare)

11: (Spare)

12: (Spare)

13: (Spare)

14: (Spare)

15: (Spare)

21/..../SERVPERM/D/................

Page 13 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/ss..s Change all Application SSI Service Permission flags

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Application SSI Service Permission Flags:

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

00: Individual Call to Mobile

01: Individual Call from Mobile

02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

04: Individual Call to Application Gateway

05: Individual Call from Application Gateway

06: Group Call

07: Send SDS

08: Receive Individual SDS

09: (Spare)

10: (Spare)

11: (Spare)

12: (Spare)

13: (Spare)

14: (Spare)

15: (Spare)

21/..../SERVPERM/A/................

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/ss..s Change all Terminal SSI Service Permission flags

NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be

significant.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Terminal SSI Service Permission Flags:

+: Service allowed

-: Service not allowed

00: Individual Call to Mobile

01: Individual Call from Mobile

02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway

03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway

04: Individual Call to Application Gateway

05: Individual Call from Application Gateway

06: Group Call

07: Send SDS

08: Receive Individual SDS

09: (Spare)

10: (Spare)

11: (Spare)

12: (Spare)

13: (Spare)

14: (Spare)

15: (Spare)

21/..../SERVPERM/T/................

Page 14 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR Display Group Call Restriction mode

The Group Call Restriction mode is used to limit subscribers to participate

in calls only to specific Groups according to the Group Permission Table.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../GROUPRESTR

21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR/s Change Group Call Restriction mode

The Group Call Restriction mode is used to limit subscribers to participate

in calls only to specific Groups according to the Group Permission Table.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Group Call Restriction mode

-: No check

D: Check dial-in calls only

A: Check all calls

21/..../GROUPRESTR/.

21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/ADD/s/s Add/Change Group Permission Table entry

The Group Call Permission Table is used to check for a subscribers permission

to participate in a Groul call to a specific Group number.

The table is used according to the Group Restriction mode selection.

NB: Leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Group User Number (0000001..9999999)

PTT Permission

+: PTT allowed to Group

-: PTT not allowed to Group

SDS Permission

+: SDS allowed to Group

-: SDS not allowed to Group

21/..../GROUPPERM/......./ADD/./.

21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/REM Remove Group Permission Table entry

The Group Call Permission Table is used to check for a subscribers permission

to participate in a Groul call to a specific Group number.

The table is used according to the Group Restriction mode selection.

NB: Leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Group User Number (0000001..9999999)

21/..../GROUPPERM/......./REM

21/nnnn/CELL Display Radio Cell Restrictions

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../CELL

Page 15 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/CELL/s Activate/Deactivate Radio Cell Restrictions

Profile Number (0000..9999)

Radio Cell restrictions

+: Activate (Only Permitted Nodes Allowed)

-: Deactivate (All Nodes allowed)

21/..../CELL/.

21/nnnn/CELL/nnn/ss..s Setup Radio Cell Permissions

Profile Number (0000..9999)

First Node Number (000..255)

Permission Flag

+: Mobile allowed on Node

-: Mobile not allowed on Node

21/..../CELL/.../..................................................

21/nnnn/VGNODE/n/nnn Setup Voice Gateway Node

Voice Gateway Nodes used of the Profile members.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

1: Primary Voice Gateway

2: Alternate Voice Gateway

Node Number (001..999, 000 for disabled)

21/..../VGNODE/./...

21/nnnn/PGNODE/n/nnn Setup Packet Data Gateway Node

Packet Date Gateway Nodes used of the Profile members.

Profile Number (0000..9999)

1: Primary Packet Data Gateway

2: Alternate Packet Data Gateway

Node Number (001..999, 000 for disabled)

21/..../PGNODE/./...

21/nnnn/POSUSERNO/n/nn..n Setup Position Destination User Number

Terminal Gateway sends Position Report to these Numbers

Profile Number (0000..9999)

1: Destination 1

2: Destination 2

User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for disabled)

21/..../POSUSERNO/./.......

21/nnnn/DNS/... Setup DNS Server IP Address

DNS Server IP Address given to the Mobile at DHCP Request

Profile Number (0000..9999)

IP Address (000..255 in each field)

21/..../DNS/...............

Page 16 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

21/nnnn/DEL Delete Profile

Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../DEL

Page 17 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Subscriber Register SSI:

22 Display SSI Register Status

22

22/nnnnnnnn Display SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/........

22/L/nnnnnnnn/snn/nn Display SSI list

First SSI (00000001..16777215)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..45)

22/L/......../.../..

22/nnnnnnnn/REG Display SSI Registration

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../REG

22/nnnnnnnn/REG/GROUP Display SSI Attached Groups

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../REG/GROUP

22/TSI/... Display TSI

MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)

MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)

SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

22/TSI/....:.....:........

22/TSI/.../L Display TSI Chain List

NB: For debug only!

MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)

MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)

SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

22/TSI/....:.....:......../L

22/TSICHAIN/nnnnnn Display TSI Chain List

NB: For debug only!

SubIx (000000..nnnnnn)

22/TSICHAIN/......

22/TSIIXTB Display TSI Indax Table

NB: For debug only!

22/TSIIXTB

Page 18 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI

User Number:

Leading zeroes are not significant

With all-zeroes User Number is disabled

IP Address:

Only LSB's are significant

Address will be masked with Subscriber IP Address Segment Mask

Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed

With all-zero significant bits IP Address is disabled

SSI of Mobile (00000001..16777215)

SSI Kind:

M: Mobile (Tetra)

Profile Number (0000..9999)

User Number (0000001..9999999)

IP address (000..255 in each field)

22/......../ADD/./..../......./...............

22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI

User Number:

Leading zeroes are not significant

With all-zeroes User Number is disabled

SSI (00000001..16777215)

SSI Kind:

G: Group

A: Application

D: Dial-In

E: Emergency

T: Terminal

P: Personal

Profile Number (0000..9999)

User Number (0000001..9999999)

22/......../ADD/./..../.......

22/nnnnnnnn/DESCR/... Setup SSI Description

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Description

22/......../DESCR/........................

22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/... Setup Visiting TSI

NB: Only available for Mobile, Group, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)

MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)

SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

22/......../TSI/....:.....:........

Page 19 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/- Clear Visiting TSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../TSI/-

22/nnnnnnnn/BLOCK/s Change SSI Blocking

SSI (00000001..16777215)

+: SSI Block

-: SSI Unblock

22/......../BLOCK/.

22/nnnnnnnn/PINCODE/cc..c Change PIN Code

PIN Code 1..9 digits, leading zeroes not significant

NB: Only available for DialIn, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

PIN Code:

1..999999999: Value

-: Disabled

22/......../PINCODE/.........

22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/... Setup TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

TEI (15 hex digits 0..9 or A..F)

22/......../TEI/...............

22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/- Clear TEI Terminal Equipment Identity

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../TEI/-

22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/... Setup SIM ID

ID of SIM Card if present

Shall be cleared if not used

If SIM ID is setup, SIM ID is used to find K in Key Register,

else TEI is used.

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

SIM ID (20 hex digits 0..9 or A..F)

22/......../SIM/....................

22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/- Clear SIM ID

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../SIM/-

Page 20 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22/nnnnnnnn/AUTHDIS/s Change Mobile Authentication Disable Flag

Note, that Authentication disable is not possible in mandatory

modes selected in the Profile register.

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Authentication Disable Flag

+: Disable Authentication

-: Authentication not disabled

22/......../AUTHDIS/.

22/nnnnnnnn/AIEDIS/s Change Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag

Note, that Air Interface Encryption disable is not possible in mandatory

mode selected in the Profile register.

NB: Only available for Mobile, Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag

+: Disable Air Interface Encryption

-: Air Interface Encryption not disabled

22/......../AIEDIS/.

22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/R Renew Security Set from Security Key

The Security Key will be search with the following references:

1) If SIM is setup, SIM will be used for Key search

2) Else if TEI is setup, TEI will be used for Key search

3) Else no renewal is done

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../SECSET/R

22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/... Setup Security Set

This command is for manual test only

Security set update should normally be done from Security Key

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Status

U: Unencrypted

E: Encrypted

RS (20 hex digits)

KS (32 hex digits)

KS' (32 hex digits)

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4

3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

22/......../SECSET/./..................../................................/....

............................

Page 21 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/C Clear Security Set

NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../SECSET/C

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPTEXT/cc..c Setup Group Text Line

Group Text Line to show on the Terminal Screen

NB: Only available for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Group Text Line

22/......../GROUPTEXT/...............

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL Display Group Include Table

If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also

include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.

NB: Only allowed for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../GROUPINCL

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/s Enable/Disable Group Include Table

If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also

include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.

NB: Only allowed for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Group Include Table

+: Activate

-: Deactivate

22/......../GROUPINCL/.

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/ADD Add/Change Group Include Table entry

If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also

include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.

Note that leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant

NB: Only allowed for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

User Number (0000001..9999999)

22/......../GROUPINCL/......./ADD

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/REM Remove Group Include Table entry

If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also

include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.

Note that leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant

NB: Only allowed for Group SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

User Number (0000001..9999999)

22/......../GROUPINCL/......./REM

Page 22 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRF/c Change Call Transfer

NB: Only available for Mobile, DialIn, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Call Transfer Type

-: None

R: Not Reachable (Weak) (Not registered/no radio

contact)

A: No Answer (Medium) (Incl. Not Reachable)

B: Busy (Strong) (Incl. No Answer and Not

Reachable)

U: Unconditional (Always) (Excluding Blocked SSI)

N: Number Change (Always) (Including Blocked SSI)

22/......../CALLTRF/.

22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFNO/cc..c Change Call Transfer Number

NB: Only available for Mobile, DialIn, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Number (0..9,#,*,+,p or w)

22/......../CALLTRFNO/..............................

22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFTIME/nn Change Call Transfer delay time

Used to change the Alerting time before Call Transfer takes place

for "Call Transfer at no B-answer"

NB: Only available for Mobile, DialIn, Application, Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Time in seconds (05..60, default 30)

22/......../CALLTRFTIME/..

22/nnnnnnnn/SUBREG/s Change Subscriber Register change permission

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Subscriber Register changes from Application

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

22/......../SUBREG/.

22/nnnnnnnn/DISCREETLIST/s Change Discreet Listening permission

Controls the permission for Discreet Listening from the Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Discreet Listening

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

22/......../DISCREETLIST/.

Page 23 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22/nnnnnnnn/AMBIENCELIST/s Change Ambience Listening permission

Controls the permission for Ambience Listening from the Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Ambience Listening

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

22/......../AMBIENCELIST/.

22/nnnnnnnn/TEMPENDIS/s Change Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable permission

Controls the permission to make Temporary Enable/Disable of a Mobile

from the Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

22/......../TEMPENDIS/.

22/nnnnnnnn/PERMDIS/s Change Permanent Mobile Disable permission

Controls the permission to make Permanant Disable of a Mobile from the

Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Permanent Mobile Disable

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

22/......../PERMDIS/.

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPMAN/s Change Mobile Group Management permission

Controls the permission to change Group attachment and setup DGNA Groups

in Mobiles from the Application.

NB: Only available for Application SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Group Management

+: Permitted

-: Not permitted

22/......../GROUPMAN/.

Page 24 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22/nnnnnnnn/NUMBERMOD/s Change Number Modification Permission

Gives permission for the Gateway to present an external provided

number instead of the SSI's User Number.

Shall be set if the SSI is e.g. a Group Bridge or similar.

NB: Only available for Application and Terminal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Number Modification Permission

+: Number Modification allowed

-: Number Modification not allowed

22/......../NUMBERMOD/.

22/nnnnnnnn/EMERGPRI/nn Change Emergency Number Call Priority

Sets the Call Priority of an Emergency SSI

This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from mobiles

Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from mobiles will always be passed unchanged

Call Priority 15 (Emergency Call Priority) is recommended for Emergency Numbers

NB: Only available for Emergency SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Call Priority

00 : Mobile Controlled

01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)

06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)

12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)

15 : Emergency Call Priority

22/......../EMERGPRI/..

22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET Display Target Table

NB: Command only available for Personal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../TARGET

22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/c Display Targets

Displays sorted according to Preference

NB: Command only available for Personal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Target Kind

V: Voice Call targets

S: SDS Call targets

I: IP Call targets

22/......../TARGET/.

Page 25 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/n/c/c/c/cc..c Add/Change/Remove Target

Add, Change or Remove a Target Number for the Personal SSI.

Targets with different Preferences will be accessed sequentially

starting with Preference 0.

Targets with same Preference will be accessed in parallel.

Voice Call:

Call will be through-connected to the Target making B-answer

SDS Call:

SDS will be send to all registered Targets.

IP Call:

IP connection will be done to first Targets with IP registation.

NB: Command only available for Personal SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Target table position (0..7)

Voice Call Preference (1..8 or -)

SDS Call Preference (1..8 or -)

IP Call Preference (1..8 or -)

Target Number (Empty to remove)

22/......../TARGET/././././..............................

22/nnnnnnnn/DEL Delete SSI

SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../DEL

Page 26 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Subscriber Register User Number:

23 Display SSI Register Status

23

23/nnnnnnn Display User Number

User Number (0000001..9999999)

23/.......

23/L/nnnnnnn/snn/nn Display User Number list

First User Number (0000001..9999999)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..45)

23/L/......./.../..

Page 27 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Subscriber Register IP Address:

24 Display SSI Register Status

24

24/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnnn Display IP Address

Only LSB's are significant

Address will be masked with Subscriber IP Address Segment Mask

Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed

IP Address (000..255 in each field)

24/...............

24/L/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/snn/nn Display IP Address list

First IP Address (000..255 in each field)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..45)

24/L/.............../.../..

Page 28 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Security Key Register:

25 Display Command function

25

25/nnnnnnnn/... Add/Change SSI Key

Used to Add/Change SSI Security Key

The Key is Scrambled automatically before it is sent to Key Register

Note: SSI shall be setup before Key is Added/Changed.

SSI (00000001..16777215)

Clear K key (Hex (0..9, A..F)

25/......../................................

Page 29 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Organization Register:

26 Display Organization Register Status

26

26/nnnn Display Organization

Organization Number (000..999)

26/...

26/L/nnn/snn/nn Display Organization list

Organization Number (000..999)

Line Offset (-50..+50)

Number of Lines (01..50)

26/L/.../.../..

26/nnn/ADD/cc..c Add/Change Organization

NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application

NB: All ranges automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Description

26/.../ADD/........................

26/nnn/PROFNO/... Change Profile Number range

Limits the Profile Numbers, which can be added via an Application Gateway

Does not limit the range for an Organization 000 Application

NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application

NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Lowest permitted Profile Number (0000..9999)

Highest permitted Profile Number (0000..9999) (0=Barred)

26/.../PROFNO/..../....

26/nnn/SSI/... Change SSI range

Limits the SSIs, which can be added via an Application Gateway

Does not limit the range for an Organization 000 Application

NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application

NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Lowest permitted SSI (00000001..16777215)

Highest permitted SSI (00000001..16777215) (0=Barred)

26/.../SSI/......../........

Page 30 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

26/nnn/USERNO/... Change User Number range

Limits the User Numbers, which can be added via an Application Gateway

Does not limit the range for an Organization 000 Application

Leading zeroes in User Numbers are not significant

NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application

NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Lowest permitted User Number (0000001..9999999)

Highest permitted User Number (0000001..9999999)

(0=Barred)

26/.../USERNO/......./.......

26/nnn/IPADDR/... Change IP Address range

Limits the IP Addresses, which can be added via an Application Gateway

Does not limit the range for an Organization 000 Application

Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed

NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application

NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000

Organization Number (000..999)

Lowest permitted IP Address (000..255)

Highest permitted IP Address (000..255)

(0=Barred)

26/.../IPADDR/.............../...............

26/nnn/PUBLRESTR/s Change Publish Restriction flag

Restricts the publishing of the Organisation.

Setting this flag will hide the existence of the Organization for all except

Home Organization Applications.

NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application

Organization Number (000..999)

Publish Restriction flag

+: Publish to Home Organization Applications only

-: Publish to all Applications

26/.../PUBLRESTR/.

26/nnn/NODERESTR/s Change Node Status Restriction flag

Restricts the publishing of Node Status.

Setting this flag will hide the Node Status in Applications.

NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application

Organization Number (000..999)

Node Status Restriction flag

+: Node Status NOT sent to Applications

-: Node Status sent to Applications

26/.../NODERESTR/.

26/nnn/DEL Delete Organization

NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application

Organization Number (000..999)

26/.../DEL

Page 31 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

API Configuration Methods

30 API CONFIGURATION METHODS

30/CONFIG/GUI Open GUI Window

Method: ConfigOpenGuiWindow()

30/CONFIG/GUI

Command description:

Page 32 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

API Subscriber Register Methods

30 API SUBSCRIBER REGISTER METHODS

30/SUBSCR/GUI Open GUI Window

Method: SubscriberOpenGuiWindow()

30/SUBSCR/GUI

30/SUBSCR/USERNO/nnnnnnn Get SSI from User Number

Method: SubscriberGetSsiFromUserNo()

User Number (0000001..9999999)

30/SUBSCR/USERNO/.......

30/SUBSCR/IPADDR/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Get SSI from IP Address

Method: SubscriberGetSsiFromIpAddr()

Only LSB's are significant as address will be masked with Subscriber

IP Address Segment Mask

IP Address (000..255 in each field)

30/SUBSCR/IPADDR/...............

30/SUBSCR/ORG1/nnn Get Organization Record ver. 1

Method: SubscriberGetOrganizationRecord1()

Organization Number (000..999)

30/SUBSCR/ORG1/...

30/SUBSCR/ORG2/nnn Get Organization Record ver. 2

Method: SubscriberGetOrganizationRecord2()

Organization Number (000..999)

30/SUBSCR/ORG2/...

30/SUBSCR/PROF1/nnnn Get Profile Record ver. 1

Method: SubscriberGetProfileRecord1()

Profile Number (0000..9999)

30/SUBSCR/PROF1/....

30/SUBSCR/PROF2/nnnn Get Profile Record ver. 2

Method: SubscriberGetProfileRecord2()

Profile Number (0000..9999)

30/SUBSCR/PROF2/....

30/SUBSCR/SSI1/nnnnnnnn Get SSI Record ver. 1

Method: SubscriberGetSsiRecord1()

SSI (00000001..16777215)

30/SUBSCR/SSI1/........

Page 33 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

30/SUBSCR/SSI2/nnnnnnnn Get SSI Record ver. 2

Method: SubscriberGetSsiRecord2()

SSI (00000001..16777215)

30/SUBSCR/SSI2/........

30/SUBSCR/REG1/nnnnnnnn Get Registration Record ver. 1

Method: SubscriberGetRegistrationRecord1()

SSI (00000001..16777215)

30/SUBSCR/REG1/........

30/SUBSCR/CMD/... Send Command to Master Subscriber Register

Method: SubscriberSendCommand()

Command

30/SUBSCR/CMD/................................................................

Command description:

Page 34 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

API Node Status Methods

30 API NODE STATUS METHODS

30/NODE/GUI Open GUI Window

Method: NodeStatusOpenGuiWindow()

30/NODE/GUI

Command description:

Page 35 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Gateway Subscriber Register Command

51 GATEWAY SUBSCRIBER REGISTER COMMAND

51 Display Command function

51

51/D Display Last Command to Gateway

51/D

51/cc..c Send Subscriber Register Command to Gateway

Sends Subscriber Register Commands to the Gateway as done from the API

without any syntax check.

The Gateway accepts the 21/... and 22/... commands.

All commands can also be executed directly with the 21/... and 22/...

commands with syntax and permission checks in the DLL.

See also 20/QUE command for the API DLL.

See also S51/D command for the Application Gateway.

See also S50/D and S20/QUE for the Master Subscriber Node.

Command String (21/.. and 22/..)

51/.................................................................

Command description:

Page 36 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

CPU Performance:

66 Display CPU Performance

66

66/C Clear Peak Hold Times

66/C

66/T Display 1msec. timer

66/T

66/Q Display Query Performance Counter

66/Q

Page 37 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

API DLL Configuration Commands:

70 Display last file save result

70

70/SAVE Save DLL API Configuration

Note: API DLL configurations is saved automatically

at any change

70/SAVE

Page 38 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

General API DLL configuration:

71 Display General API DLL configuration

71

71/IDPROMPT/+ Prompt User for ID

71/IDPROMPT/+

71/IDPROMPT/- Use ID in configuration

71/IDPROMPT/-

71/USERNO/nnnnnnn Select/change Own User Number ID

Selects User Number as Application ID

NB: Leading zeroes are not significant

Own User Number (0000001..9999999)

71/USERNO/.......

71/TSI/nnnn:nnnnn:nnnnnnnn Select/change Own Tetra Subscriber ID

Selects TSI as Application ID

MCC Mobile Network Code (0001..1023)

MNC Mobile Network Code (00001..16383)

SSI Short Subscriber Identity (00000001..16777215)

71/TSI/....:.....:........

71/PIN/+ Prompt User for Pin Code

71/PIN/+

71/PIN/- Disable use of Pin Code

71/PIN/-

71/PIN/nnnnnnnnn Setup/Change PIN Code

PIN Code 1..9 digits, leading zeroes not significant

PIN Code (1..999999999)

71/PIN/.........

71/OMPORT/nnnnn Change OM TCP Port Number

Command to change the OM TCP listening Port

The default Port Number of the ApiDll is different from

the BSC to avoid conflict when running on the same PC.

When establishment of a connection is not possible,

change the port number in the Config.txt file directly.

Use the newest versions of the TetraOM program to allow

to setup the Port Number.

OM TCP Port (01024..65535, default 42382)

71/OMPORT/.....

Page 39 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

71/OMPIN/nn..n Change OM PIN Code

Command to change the OM PIN Code

Used to protect OM access to DLL

Defaults to a pseudo-random 32 Bit value

The value zero disables PIN Code prompt

To be viewed and changed in Config.txt file directly

OM PIN Code (0..4294967295)

71/OMPIN/..........

Page 40 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API TetraFlexApi DLL ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Gateway configuration:

72 Display Gateways

72

72/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/... Add/Change Gateway

Gateway Number (0..9)

IP Address

Description

72/./.............../........................

72/n/- Remove Gateway

Gateway Number (0..9)

72/./-

Page 41 of 41Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the TR412 Base Station Transceiver consist of a

2-digit command in the range 00 to 99 with an optionally parameter. Commands

without parameters are display-only commands and will not make any change

in the TR. Therefore, it is possible to "page through" the commands to find

the right one without any risk to change vital parameters.

The commands are divided into groups, covering the different functions in

the TR. For example, all the TX commands are in the 10 to 19 group.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in the 00 to

99 range, an error message will be displayed:

Invalid TR412 command

This is however not the case if the first character is a + , which are reser-

ved for commands to the test box. In this case no response will be sent.

If an unimplemented TR command is called, the following response is

displayed:

Unimplemented TR412 command

LOCAL BLOCKING MODE

After power-on, the TR always starts in normal operating mode. If a given

command requires local blocking, it is shown in the help for the command.

Commands that require local blocking are not available during normal

operation for operator interference. If a protected command is called,

the following response is displayed:

Local blocking necessary

Only commands with a parameter are will be protected. After activation of

local blocking (01+), all commands except factory configuration commands are

available.

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used

as parameter to turn off, disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command no.

followed by the necessary no. of characters for the actual function.

Page 1 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response

is displayed:

Invalid TR412 parameter

CONFIGURATION

Many calibration and system parameters are stored residently in a sector

of the Flash chip. At power-up and reset all settings are copied into the

workspace RAM, from where the different software tasks takes the settings.

Any change in the configuration is only made in the workspace RAM. To store

the new configuration residently, a save command shall be made.

The configuration is divided into two separate entities:

1) System configuration

2) Factory configuration

System configuration parameters can be changed with the 7x commands. To save

the system configuration resistently, the command "70/SAVE" shall be

entered.

Factory configuration parameters can be changed with the 9x commands. To

protect the operator from accidentially changing the factory configuration

parameters, an access lock is implemented, giving the following message:

Factory configuration unlocking necessary

To get access to factory configuration changes, it is necessary to enter

the command "90/FACTORYUNLOCK". Unlocking can be turned off again with the

"90-" command.

To save the factory configuration, the command "90/SAVE" shall be entered.

The resident configuration is restored into the workspace RAM at software

reset (02+) or local deblocking (01-) if re-booting take place.

LED description

The TR412 unit has 14 LEDS on its front plate with the following

arrangenent (note, that there can be differences on the fromt plate

print):

1+2..: PWR Y G TX

3+4..: TETRA G G MPT

5+6..: LB R R TX

7+8..: RFTL R R RX

9+10.: PCM R R DSP

11+12: HW R R ANT

13+14: H/E R R RM

The LEDs have the following meaning:

Page 2 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

1. PWR (yellow)

On:

Normal operation

Flashing:

Waiting for configuration from BSC

2. TX (green)

On:

TX keyed

3. TETRA (green)

On:

TETRA mode activated

4. NMT/MPT (green)

On:

Analog mode mode activated

5. LB (red)

On:

Local Blocking activated

Flashing:

Local Blocking requested

6. TX (red)

On:

TX PLL unlocked

VSWR protection circuit trigged

TX temperature protection is active (on at +85C, off at +83C)

+26V supply outside +/-2V tolerance

TX voltage reference faulty

7. RFTL (red)

On:

RF Test Loop output activated

Flashing:

Last selftest failed

8. RX (red)

On:

LO1 or LO2 PLL unlocked

LO1 level out of range

LO2 level out of range

9. PCM (red)

On:

12.8 MHz PLL unlocked (2.048 MHz missing from backplane)

36.864 MHz PLL unlocked (8 kHz missing from backplane)

1 sec. missing (from backplane)

Flashing:

Time message from BSC missing

TX not time synchronised

10. DSP (red)

On:

DSP watchdog alarm

11. HW (red)

Currently not used

12. ANT (red)

On:

TX Antenna L2 (blocking)

Flashing:

TX Antenna L1 (warning)

Page 3 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX combiner TP alarm

13. H/E (red)

On:

Any of the external alarm inputs activated

14. RM (red)

On:

Both RX signal paths faulty

Flashing:

One of the two RX signal paths faulty

Individual alarm flags can be displayed with the 03 commands.

Page 4 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Address commands

ADDRESS COMMANDS

A Display address

A

Ann Select address

1..4: Cassette number

1..8: TR (Transceiver)

a..d: PS (Power Supply)

A..B: TCC (TX Combiner Controller)

A..

A++ Forced address select

A++

Command description:

Page 5 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

General commands

00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

00 Display software version

00

00/A Display all software version numbers

00/A

Command description:

01 LOCAL BLOCKING/DEBLOCKING

01 Display Local Blocking selection

01

01+ Local Blocking conditional request

01+

01++ Local Blocking forced request

01++

01- Local Blocking off

01-

01/S Execute software reset

Local blocking necessary

01/S

01/H Execute hardware reset

Local blocking necessary

01/H

Command description:

02 TR OPERATING MODE

02 Display TR operating mode

02

02/c Change TR operating mode

Local blocking necessary

-: Test

N: NMT (analog)

T: TETRA (digital)

02/.

Command description:

Page 6 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

03 TR ALARMS

03 Display TR Alarm state

03

03/A Display Internal Alarms

03/A

03/B Display BSC Alarms

03/B

03/E Display External Alarms

03/E

03/C Clear TR alarms

03/C

03/L Display alarm latching selection

03/L

03/L/s Change alarm latching selection

Local blocking necessary

-: Disable alarm latching

+: Enable alarm latching (default)

03/L/.

Command description:

05 DISPLAY CONFIG/STATUS FROM BSC

05 Display Config/Status from BSC

05

Command description:

07 DISPLAY DATE AND TIME

07 Display date/time

07

07/S Display date/time status

07/S

07/T Display DSP TETRA Counters

07/T

Command description:

Page 7 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Transmitter commands

10 TX KEY

10 Display TX key state

10

10+ Turn on TX

Local blocking necessary

10+

10- Turn off TX

Local blocking necessary

10-

10/T Display timeslot key

Only available in Tetra mode

10/T

10/T/ssss Change TX timeslot key

Local blocking necessary

Only available in Tetra mode

TS1 key (+,-)

TS2 key (+,-)

TS3 key (+,-)

TS4 key (+,-)

10/T/....

10/AUTO Display Auto TX-off mode

Only available in Tetra mode

10/AUTO

10/AUTO/c Change Auto TX-off mode

Has priority over control from L3

Only significant in Tetra mode without Local Blocking

Only available in Tetra mode

-: Controlled of L3

D: Automatic TX-off disabled

C: Automatic Carrier-off (TX-off if all Timeslots idle)

T: Automatic Timeslot-off (TX-off of idle Timeslots)

10/AUTO/.

Command description:

11 DISPLAY TX OUTPUT AND REFLECTED POWER

11 Display TX output and reflected power

11

Page 8 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Command description:

12 DISPLAY TX COMBINER TESTPOINT VALUE

12 Display TX combiner TP value

12

Command description:

13 TX OUTPUT POWER LEVEL SELECTIONS

13 Display TX output power selection

13

13/+nn.n Change TX output power

Local blocking necessary

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

The selected power is TETRA mean power on TR connector

Maxim Peak Envelope Power is 3.8dB higher

For NMT/MPT (analog PM) power is +3dB the selected power

For Test mode single tone, mean power is equal to Peak Envelope Power

For Test mode two-tone, mean power is -3dB of Peak Envelope Power

Output power selection

TR412 : 30.0 to 44.0 [dBm]

TR412H: 34.0 to 48.0 [dBm]

13/+....

13/MIN Change TX output power to minimum

Local blocking necessary

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

13/MIN

13/MAX Change TX output power to maximum

Local blocking necessary

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

13/MAX

Page 9 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

13/RED/+nn.n Change Reduced TX output power

Local blocking necessary

Power setting for Reduced Power (Alarm Input 8 activated)

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

The selected power is TETRA mean power on TR connector

Maxim Peak Envelope Power is 3.8dB higher

For NMT/MPT (analog PM) power is +3dB the selected power

For Test mode single tone, mean power is equal to Peak Envelope Power

For Test mode two-tone, mean power is -3dB of Peak Envelope Power

Reduced Output power selection

TR412 : 30.0 to 44.0 [dBm]

TR412H: 34.0 to 48.0 [dBm]

13/RED/+....

13/RED/MIN Change Reduced TX output power to minimum

Local blocking necessary

Power setting for Reduced Power (Alarm Input 8 activated)

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

13/RED/MIN

13/RED/MAX Change Reduced TX output power to maximum

Local blocking necessary

Power setting for Reduced Power (Alarm Input 8 activated)

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

13/RED/MAX

Command description:

15 Display TX test modulation selection

15

15/ZERO Select zero modulation

I and Q DAC set to zero (with zero offset compensation)

15/ZERO

15/CW Select CW modulation

Power level analog-value of selected power (5/6 of pep)

15/CW

15/CW/PEP Select CW modulation PEP value

Power level is pep-value of selected power

15/CW/PEP

15/CW/IQ Display I/Q values for CW modulation

15/CW/IQ

Page 10 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

15/CW/cs Select CW modulation

I: I DAC output

Q: Q DAC output

+: Positive DAC output

-: Negative DAC output

15/CW/..

15/CW/IQ/snnnnn/snnnnn Select CW modulation with I/Q values

NB: I and Q values are modified with power setting, I+Q offset

and quadrature settings before reaching the DACs.

I-value (-32768..+32767)

Q-value (-32768..+32767)

15/CW/IQ/....../......

15/DSB/c/n Select DSB modulation

I: I generated DSB modulation

Q: Q generated DSB modulation

2: 2.25 kHz

4: 4.50 kHz

9: 9.00 kHz

15/DSB/./.

15/cSB/n Select SSB modulation

L: LSB (Lower Side Band)

U: USB (Upper Side Band)

2: 2.25 kHz

4: 4.50 kHz

15/.SB/.

15/PRBS9 Select TETRA PRBS-9 modulation

15/PRBS9

15/PRBS15 Select TETRA PRBS-15 modulation

15/PRBS15

15/PH45 Select TETRA +/-45deg. modulation

15/PH45

15/FM/3 Select FM 1kHz +/-3kHz

15/FM/3

15/MULTI Select DSB multitone modulation

15/MULTI

Page 11 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

16 TX FILTER

16 Display TX filter type

16

16/n Change TX filter type

TX filter type

0: TETRA 25kHz ch. spacing

1: Flat (for test)

16/.

Command description:

17 Display TX status

17

17/IQ Display TX IQ values

17/IQ

18 TX CARTESIAN LOOP COMMANDS

18 Display cartesian loop selection

18

18- Select open cartesian loop

18-

18+ Select closed cartesian loop

18+

18/P TX cartesian loop phase measurement

18/P

18/A TX cartesian loop phase/ampl. measurement

18/A

18/FREQ TX cartesian loop phase vs frequency measurement

18/FREQ

18/PWR TX cartesian loop phase vs. power measurement

18/PWR

18/ADJUST TX cartesian open loop phase adjust

WARNING: Factory adjust command, factory unlock necessary

Changes same parameter as the 91/PH0/snnn command

18/ADJUST

Command description:

Page 12 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

19 TX PLL/KEY COMMANDS

19 Display command function

19

19/F Select fast TX PLL loop

Local blocking necessary

19/F

19/S Select slow TX PLL loop

Local blocking necessary

19/S

19/FREQ Display TX PLL voltage vs frequency

Local blocking necessary

19/FREQ

19+ Switch TX on and off continuously

Local blocking necessary

19+

19/nnnn Switch TX channel continuously between current and nnnn

Local blocking necessary

TX channel number

19/....

Command description:

Page 13 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Receiver commands

20 RX LO

20 Display RX LO status

20

Command description:

21 DISPLAY RX RSSI

21 Display RX RSSI

With 5 msec. settling time

21

21/c Display RX RSSI

RSSI option

0: 100 msec. settling time

1: 1 sec. settling time

Q: 5 msec. settling time without header

21/.

21/NF Display RX Noise Figure

Displays the RSSI value as equivalent Noise Figure

The reference depends on the actual IF filter

bandwidth, see the 26 command

21/NF

21/FFT/c Display FFT result

RX path:

A: RX-A

B: RX-B

21/FFT/.

21/FFT/c/2 Display 2.25kHz FFT amplitude results

Response is:

-nnn.n :-6.75 kHz [dBm]

-nnn.n :-2.25 kHz [dBm]

-nnn.n : 0.00 kHz [dBm]

-nnn.n :+2.25 kHz [dBm]

-nnn.n :+6.75 kHz [dBm]

RX path:

A: RX-A

B: RX-B

21/FFT/./2

Command description:

Page 14 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

22 RX DIVERSITY

22 Display RX diversity selection

22

22/A A-forced RX diversity selection

22/A

22/B B-forced RX diversity selection

22/B

22- Automatic RX diversity selection

22-

Command description:

23 RX ANTENNA TEST

23 Display command function

23

23+ RX antenna measurement command

23+

Command description:

25 Display RX test demodulation mode

25

25/PM Select PM demodulation

25/PM

25/FFT Select FFT demodulation

25/FFT

26 RX FILTER

26 Display RX filter type

26

26/n Change RX filter type

RX filter type

0: TETRA 25kHz ch. spacing

1: PM 25kHz ch. spacing (+/-7.5kHz)

2: PM 25kHz ch. spacing interleaved (+/-6.5kHz)

3: PM 20kHz ch. spacing (+/-6kHz)

4: PM 12.5kHz ch. spacing (+/-3.75kHz)

5: Flat (for test)

26/.

Page 15 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Command description:

27 RX SIGNAL DISPLAY COMMANDS

27 Display command function

27

27/ADC Display RX ADC signals

27/ADC

27/CP/c Display TETRA constellation points

RX path:

A: RX-A

B: RX-B

27/CP/.

Command description:

28 RX ADJUST COMMANDS

28 Display command function

28

28/LO Display LO1 injection

28/LO

28/PLL Display LO1 PLL voltage vs frequency

28/PLL

Command description:

29 SWITCH RX CHANNEL CONTINUOUSLY

29 Display command 29 function

29

29/F Select fast TX FS loop

29/F

29/S Select slow TX FS loop

29/S

29/nnnn Switch RX channel continuously between current and nnnn

Local blocking necessary

RX channel number

29/....

Command description:

Page 16 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Response:

1) RX FS switch command 29 response

2) RX FS switch cont. 29/nnnn response

Description:

The 29+ and 29/nnnn commands starts a continuous switching between two channels.

Page 17 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Common commands

30 CHANNEL COMMANDS

30 Display RX+TX channel numbers

30

30/nnnn Change RX+TX channel number

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

NB: Channel Number step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)

Channel number

30/....

30/R/nnnn Change RX channel number

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

NB: Channel Number step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)

RX channel number

30/R/....

30/T/nnnn Change TX channel number

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

NB: Channel Number step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)

TX channel number

30/T/....

30/R/nnnn.nnnnnn Change RX frequency

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

NB: Frequency range and step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)

Frequency [MHz]

30/R/...........

30/T/nnnn.nnnnnn Change TX frequency

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

NB: Frequency range and step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)

Frequency [MHz]

30/T/...........

Command description:

31 Display BSC signals and PLL status

31

32 Display RFTL selection

32

Page 18 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

32+ Turn on RFTL high

Turns on output to -40dBr

32+

32/L Turn on RFTL low

Turns on output to -50dBr

Not supported in older hardware versions

32/L

32- Turn off RFTL

32-

33 PCM HIGHWAY

33 Display PCM highway selections

33

33/c/s PCM highway loopback control

When activated, the incoming timeslot bitstream is returned on

the outgoing timeslot.

TR timeslot number

1: TR timeslot 1

2: TR timeslot 2

3: TR timeslot 3

4: TR timeslot 4

A: All 4 TR timeslots

+: Activate loopback

-: Stop loopback

33/./.

Command description:

Highway timeslot numbers:

Pos: x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8

---- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

TS1: 00 04 08 12 16 20 24 28

TS2: 01 05 09 13 17 21 25 29

TS3: 02 06 10 14 18 22 26 30

TS4: 03 07 11 15 19 23 27 31

34 CMoIP

34 Display CMoIP status

34

34/C Clear CMoIP Downlink statistics counters

34/C

Command description:

Page 19 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

35 BLOWER

35 Display blower state

35

35+ Select forced fast Blower

35+

35- Deselect forced fast Blower

35-

Command description:

All blowers mounted below the TR cassette can run with two

speeds (except for backplanes from before 2001).

Under normal conditions, all blowers are running with slow speed.

When any of the mounted TR412 in that cassette exceeds the temperature

+60C, it will force the blower speed to fast speed.

When the temperature on that transceiver again drops below +55, it will

stop forcing the blowers to fast speed.

Fast blower speed can also be selected for test purposes with O&M

commands.

43 Display Timeslot status

43

43/CNTR Display counter values

43/CNTR

43/CNTR/C Clear counter values

43/CNTR/C

43/CONST/n/c Display constellation points

Timeslot number (1..4)

RX path (A or B)

43/CONST/./.

48 Display Message Trace

48

49 Display Tetra channel test selection

49

Page 20 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

49/CHTST/nn/n Activate Tetra channel test

Uplink test point channel type:

07: TCH/7.2

08: SCH/F

09: STCH

10: TCH/2.4 N=1

11: SCH/HU

16: TCH/S

18: TCH/4.8 N=1

Downlink test point channel type:

57: TCH/7.2

60: TCH/2.4 N=1

66: TCH/S

68: TCH/4.8 N=1

Timeslot (1..4)

49/CHTST/../.

49- Stop Tetra channel test

49-

Command description:

The 49 commands control the TR412 build-in TETRA channel test features.

When channel test is activated, a test point at the output from the receiver

or alternatively at the input from the PCM highway is selected. Received bursts

including status will be send to the BSC via the HDLC bus, where BER/MER mea-

surements can be made with the F49 commands.

When channel test is activated, the TR412 TX switches to uplink mode and

generates the selected channel type. When TX is keyed and RFTL activated,

an RX input signal can be generated for the testing.

Alternatively, a test signal can be generated from an external source, e.g.

an R&S SMIQ or Anritsu signal generator

The uplink test point is intended for normal receiver channel tests.

The downlink test point is intented for test of received circuit mode traffic

transmitted via the PCM highway, and optionally an E1 connection and the

looped back. The signal can be generated on one TR412 and monitored on a

downlink

testpoint on another TR412 on the same or another BS.

Page 21 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Test commands

60 DC VOLTMETER

60 Display DC test points

60

60/A Display all DC test points

60/A

60/nn Display specific DC test point

TP number (00..16)

60/..

60/T Display temperature

60/T

60/REF Display DC voltmeter reference voltage

60/REF

Command description:

Description:

The command displays the DC voltage on one of the xx DC test points.

The displayed reading is taken from a RAM register array, which is updated

every 24/1000 sec. Therefore, some delay can be necessary in connection

with automatic test equipment.

61 Display DSP state

61

61/CNTR Display DSP counters

61/CNTR

61/CNTR/C Clear DSP counters

61/CNTR/C

61- Stop DSP execution

Activates DSP hardware reset

61-

Page 22 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

61+ Restart DSP

Makes:

1) Hardware reset on

2) Hardware reset off

3) DSP memory clear

4) DSP code installation

5) Interface register init

6) Program execution start

61+

61/+ Release DSP reset

DSP reset state necessary

Afterward, manual R/W can be done

61/+

61/B Boot DSP without execution

Makes:

1) Hardware reset on

2) Hardware reset off

3) DSP memory clear

4) DSP code installation

5) Interface register init

Afterward, manual R/W and program execution start can be done

61/B

61/R Start DSP program run

DSP booted state necessary

61/R

61/hhhhhhhh Display DSP memory word

DSP memory address (32-bit aligned hex)

61/........

61/hhhhhhh0/B Display DSP memory byte-wise

DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/B

61/hhhhhhh0/W Display DSP memory word-wise

DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/W

61/hhhhhhh0/D Display DSP memory doublewordwise

DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/D

Page 23 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

61/REG/c Display DSP interface registers

D: DSP control/status registers

C: Radio calibration registers

R: Radio control registers

S: Radio status registers

M: Message queue registers

T: Tetra mode registers

61/REG/.

61/hhhhhhhh/hhhhhhhh Change DSP memory

DSP memory address (32-bit aligned hex)

Data to write (hex)

61/......../........

61/HPIC DSP HPIC read-back

61/HPIC

61/HPIA/hhhhhhhh DSP HPIA write/read test

Value to write to HPIA (hex)

61/HPIA/........

65 HDLC BUS MESSAGE QUEUE

65 Display command function

65

65/N Display next HDLC message

65/N

65/C Clear HDLC test queue

65/C

65/S Set HDLC test queue to start

65/S

65/s Message display suppress control

+: Display all messages

-: Suppress $0A, $0F, $33, $8A, $8C, $8F and $B3 messages (default)

65/.

65/ADDR Display HDLC queue addresses

65/ADDR

65/OWN Display OWN bits

65/OWN

Page 24 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

65/BUF Display current HDLC descriptors

65/BUF

65/BUF/nnn Display HDLC descriptors

Ring descriptor index (000..127)

65/BUF/...

65/hhhhhhhh..hh Send HDLC message to BSC

Message in hex

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

65/..........................................................................

65/TST Display HDLC test variables

65/TST

65/TST/c Start/stop sending HDLC test messages

B: Send messages looped-back in BSC

I: Send messages looped-back in BSC IP stack

O: Send messages looped-back in other BSC

S: Send messages looped-back in BSS/SC

-: Stop sending messages

65/TST/.

65/TST/C Clear HDLC test error counters

65/TST/C

65/TST/nn/nnn/nn Change HDLC test message output parameters

Numer of messages send each time (01..99)

Send repetition time (001..999 msec.)

Payload length (00..99)

65/TST/../.../..

Command description:

66 CPU LOAD COMMAND

66 Display CPU load

66

66/C Clear max-counter values

66/C

66/LOAD Display random load value

66/LOAD

Page 25 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

66/LOAD/nnnn Change random load value

Random load value (0000..9999)

66/LOAD/....

Command description:

67 INPUT/OUTPUT COMMANDS

67/LEDS Display LED state

67/LEDS

67/ADDRPORT Display address port

67/ADDRPORT

Command description:

68 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

68 Display command

68

68/DOWNLOAD Request program download from BSC

1) Mark download request in flash

2) Make hardware reset to enter download mode

68/DOWNLOAD

68/CHKSUM Display flash checksum

68/CHKSUM

Command description:

69 DISPLAY MEMORY

69 Display boot program version number

69

69/hhhh0 Display memory area

Memory address segment ($0000..$FFFF)

69/....0

69/D/hhh0 Display data segment area

Data segment offset ($0000..$FFF0)

69/D/...0

69/ADDR Display memory addresses

69/ADDR

Page 26 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

69/IO/hhhh Display I/O Port

I/O Address ($0000..$FFFF)

69/IO/....

Command description:

Description:

The command displayes the contents of a memory area of the AM186CC microcontroller.

Page 27 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

System configuration

70 Display system configuration status

70

70/SAVE Save system configuration in flash

70/SAVE

70/CNFG Return system configuration

70/CNFG

71 Display TX settings

71

71/TCTP/n.nnn Change TX Combiner TP alarm threshold

TX Combiner TP alarm threshold (0.000..5.000VDC)

71/TCTP/.....

72 Display RX settings

72

72/PREGAIN/n.n Change RX pre-gain setting

RX pre-gain in dB (0.0..9.9, nom. 6.0)

72/PREGAIN/...

Page 28 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Factory configuration

90 Display factory configuration status

90

90/FACTORYUNLOCK Select factory configuration unlock

UNLOCK

90/FACTORY......

90- Deselect factory configuration unlock

90-

90/SAVE Save factory configuration in flash

90/SAVE

90/CNFG Return factory configuration

90/CNFG

Page 29 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX factory configuration

91 TX SETTINGS

91 Display TX factory configuration

91

91/IZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop I-zero

DAC full scale is +/-32767

-9999..+9999

91/IZEROOL/.....

91/QZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop Q-zero

DAC full scale is +/-32767

-9999..+9999

91/QZEROOL/.....

91/LOOPGAIN/nnn Change Loop Gain

Used to reduce DAC output level at open loop

010..200

91/LOOPGAIN/...

91/QAMPL/n.nnnn Change TX Q-amplitude balance

0.9000..1.1000

91/QAMPL/......

91/QPHASE/sn.nnnn Change TX Q-phase quadrature

-0.2500..+0.2500

91/QPHASE/.......

91/PH0/nnn Select Cartesian Loop channel 0 phase adjust value

Channel 0 phase adjust value in degree (000..359)

91/PH0/...

91/PHS/snnn Change Cartesian Loop channel phase step value

Typical value:

400MHz: +090

800MHz: +050

Phase change per channel in millidegree (-999..+999)

91/PHS/....

Page 30 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

91/MAXPWR/nnn.nn Change max. TX power setting

000.10..500.00 W

91/MAXPWR/......

91/PWR/n.nnn Change TX power setting

0.500..2.000

91/PWR/.....

91/PMOUT/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter output setting

Typical value for 60W PEP PA: 1.000

Typical value for 150W PEP PA: 2.500

0.700..3.500

91/PMOUT/.....

91/PMREFL/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter reflected setting

Typical value for 60W PEP PA: 1.000

Typical value for 150W PEP PA: 2.500

0.700..3.500

91/PMREFL/.....

91/ZERO Display TX carrier zero adjust table

91/ZERO

91/ZERO/nnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table channel step

Value shall be max. channel number divided by 8

Normal value for 400MHz range: 100

Normal value for 800MHz range: 200

Number of channels between table entries (010..500)

91/ZERO/...

91/ZERO/n/snnnn/snnnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table value

Table entry position (0..8)

I zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)

Q zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)

91/ZERO/./...../.....

91/ZERO/n/snnnn/snnnn/Q Setup TX carrier zero adjust table value (quiet)

Table entry position (0..8)

I zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)

Q zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)

91/ZERO/./...../...../Q

Command description:

Page 31 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Common factory configuration

93 COMMON SETTINGS

93 Display common factory settings

93

93/CHSTEP/nn.nnn Change channel step size

Channel step size:

06.250: 6.25kHz

12.500: 12.5kHz

93/CHSTEP/......

93/CHRX0/nnnnnn Change RX channel zero

Value shall be (RX channel 0 frequency)/(Channel step size)

Values for 12.5kHz step size:

300MHz: 024000

350MHz: 028000

380MHz: 030400

410MHz: 032800

450MHz: 036000

805MHz: 064400

Values for 6.25kHz step size:

300MHz: 048000

350MHz: 056000

380MHz: 060800

410MHz: 065600

450MHz: 072000

805MHz: 128800

RX channel 0

93/CHRX0/......

Page 32 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

93/CHTX0/nnnnnn Change TX channel zero

Value shall be (TX channel 0 frequency)/(Channel step size)

Values for 12.5kHz step size:

336MHz: 026880

360MHz: 028800

390MHz: 031200

420MHz: 033600

460MHz: 036800

850MHz: 068000

Values for 6.25kHz step size:

336MHz: 053760

360MHz: 057600

390MHz: 062400

420MHz: 067200

460MHz: 073600

850MHz: 136000

TX channel 0

93/CHTX0/......

93/CHIFOFS/snnnn Change 1st LO IF channel offset

Value shall be (1st IF frequency)/(Channel step size)

Typical value: -3600 for -45MHz

Values for 45MHz IF, underlying 1st LO:

12.5kHz step size: -3600

6.25kHz step size: -7200

1st LO IF offset (-9999..+9999)

93/CHIFOFS/.....

93/CHTCOFS/snnnn Change TC channel offset

Channel number offset between TX and Combiner

TX combiner channel offset (-9999..+9999, normal +0000)

93/CHTCOFS/.....

93/CHMIN/nnnn Change lowest used channel number

Normally set to 0000

Lowest used channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHMIN/....

93/CHMAX/nnnn Change highest used channel number

Values for 12.5kHz step size:

10MHz bandwidth (400MHz): 0800

20MHz bandwidth (800MHz): 1600

Values for 6.25MHz step size:

10MHz bandwidth (400MHz): 1600

20MHz bandwidth (800MHz): 3200

Highest used channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHMAX/....

Page 33 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Command description:

Page 34 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Test circuit configuration

96 TEST CIRCUIT SETTINGS

96 Display Test circuit settings

96

96/DCVM/n.nnn Change DC Voltmeter calibration constant

Calibration constant (4.700..5.300, nom. 5.000)

96/DCVM/.....

96/THERM/snn.n Change Thermometer calibration offset

Calibration offset (-99.9..+99.9, nom. +00.0)

96/THERM/.....

Command description:

Page 35 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Hardware identity

98 HARDWARE ID

98 Display hardware ID

98

98/TYPE Display type number

98/TYPE

98/ITEM Display item number

98/ITEM

98/SER Display serial number

98/SER

98/VER Display version number

98/VER

98/REV Display revision number

98/REV

98/ITEM/cc..c Change item number

Item number

98/ITEM/...............

98/SER/cc..c Change serial number

Serial number

98/SER/........

98/VER/n.nn Change version number

Version number

98/VER/....

98/REV/n Change revision number

Revision number (0..9)

98/REV/.

Command description:

Page 36 of 36Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Functional Description:

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the TR421 Transceiver consist of a

2-digit command in the range 00 to 99 with an optionally parameter. Commands

without parameters are display-only commands and will not make any change

in the TR.

The commands are divided into groups, covering the different functions in

the TR. For example, all the TX commands are in the 10 to 19 group.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in the 00 to

99 range, an error message will be displayed:

Invalid TR421 command

If an unimplemented TR command is called, the following response is

displayed:

Unimplemented TR421 command

OPERATOR BLOCKING MODE

After power-on, the TR always starts in normal operating mode. If a given

command requires operator blocking, it is shown in the help for the command.

Commands that require operator blocking are not available during normal

operation for operator interference. If a protected command is called,

the following response is displayed:

Operator blocking necessary

Only commands with a parameter are protected. After activation of

operator blocking (01+), all commands except factory configuration commands

are available.

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used

as parameter to turn off, disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command no.

followed by the necessary no. of characters for the actual function.

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response

is displayed:

Invalid TR421 parameter

Page 1 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

CONFIGURATION

Many calibration and system parameters are stored residently.

At power-up and reset all settings are copied into the

workspace RAM, from where the different software tasks takes the settings.

Any change in the configuration is only made in the workspace RAM. To store

the new configuration residently, a save command shall be made.

The configuration is divided into two separate entities:

1) System configuration

2) Factory configuration

System configuration parameters can be changed with the 7x commands. To save

the system configuration resistently, the command "70/SAVE" shall be

entered.

Factory configuration parameters can be changed with the 9x commands. To

protect the operator from accidentially changing the factory configuration

parameters, an access lock is implemented, giving the following message:

Factory configuration unlocking necessary

To get access to factory configuration changes, it is necessary to enter

the command "90/FACTORYUNLOCK". Unlocking can be turned off again with the

"90-" command.

To save the factory configuration, the command "90/SAVE" shall be entered.

The resident configuration is restored into the workspace RAM at software

reset (02+) or local deblocking (01-) if re-booting take place.

LED description

The BS421 has the following internal LEDs:

LED Color Marking Function

---- ------ ------- --------------------

D408 Yellow Pwr Power

D407 Green TX TX keyed

D406 Red Oper Operator Blocking

D405 Red RFTL RFTL activated

D404 Red TX TX Alarm

D403 Red RX RX Alarm

D402 Red CU Control Unit Alarm

D401 Red DSP DSP alarm

D400 Red Sync Sync Alarm

Individual alarm flags can be displayed with the 03 commands.

Boot Loader Reprogramming

Page 2 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

The BS421 contains a Boot Loader in the on-board Flash.

The Boot Loader starts execution after Power-on or Hardware Reset.

The Boot Loader reads the Windows CE operation system contained in the

NK.bin file on the CF-Card into memory and starts its execution.

From version 7.30 the version of the Boot Loader is shown at TR421 startup

and with the 00/A command.

From version 7.30 the Boot Loader can also be reprogrammed of TR421.exe.

To update the Boot Loader, put the Boot.bin file in the root directory of

the CF-card (together with NK.bin) and restart the TR421.

The Boot Loader reprogramming will be shown on the screen at startup.

After the update the Boot.bin file shall be removed again to prevent

re-programming at every restart.

Warning: Do not turn off power of BS421 during update as this will

corrupt the BS421 Boot Loader!

Page 3 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Software Version:

00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

00 Display software version

00

00/A Display all software version numbers

00/A

00/OM Display OM Connection status

00/OM

00/BSC Display BSC Connection status

00/BSC

Command description:

Page 4 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Operator Blocking:

01 OPERATOR BLOCKING/DEBLOCKING

01 Display Operator Blocking selection

01

01+ Operator Blocking request

01+

01- Operator Blocking off

Makes a restart of the TR421 service

01-

01/DEBUG Display Debug Commands Enable selection

01/DEBUG

01/DEBUG/+ Enable Debug Commands

NB: Should only be used of software developers!

01/DEBUG/+

01/DEBUG/- Disable Debug Commands

01/DEBUG/-

Command description:

Page 5 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Operating Mode:

02 TR OPERATING MODE

02 Display TR operating mode

02

02/c Change TR operating mode

Local blocking necessary

-: Test

A: Analog

T: TETRA

02/.

Command description:

Page 6 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Alarms:

03 ALARMS

03 Display Alarm State

03

03/A Display Alarm Flags

03/A

03/E Display BSC External Alarms

03/E

03/C Clear Alarms

03/C

03/LED Display LED State

03/LED

Command description:

Page 7 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSC:

05 BSC

05 Display BSC status/configuration

05

Command description:

Page 8 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

MAC Address:

06 NETWORK ADDRESSES

06 Display Network settings

06

06/MAC Display MAC Address

06/MAC

06/SYNC Synchronize Flash and Registry Settings

If Registry settings are valid, Flash is updated with Registry values,

else Registry settings are created from Flash values (if valid).

The synchronization is also done automatically at startup of TR421.dll.

The Flash mirror ensures, that Network Settings are not lost at update

of the WinCE Operating System (NK.bin), where a new registry i created.

06/SYNC

06/NAME/cc.c Setup Host Name

Sets the Windows CE Host Name.

The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.

Recommended Name is "Nnnn-BS1-TRx", where nnn is Node Number and

x is TR number.

NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).

Host Name

06/NAME/...............

06/DHCP/s Setup DHCP

Sets to use DHCP or Fixed Addresses.

The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.

NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).

DHCP selection

+: DHCP Server provides IP Address/Mask/Gateway

-: Manually entered IP Address/Mask/Gateway

06/DHCP/.

06/IPADDR/... Setup IP Address

Sets the IP Address.

The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.

Recommended IP Address is 172.016.nnn.hhh, where nnn is Node Number

and hhh is 011..018 for TR1 to TR8.

NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).

IP Address (0..255 in each field)

06/IPADDR/...............

Page 9 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

06/IPMASK/... Setup IP Mask

Sets the IP Mask.

The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.

IP Mask shall normally be 255.255.255.000.

NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).

IP Mask (0..255 in each field)

06/IPMASK/...............

06/IPGW/... Setup IP Default Gateway

Sets the IP Default Gateway.

The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.

IP Gateway shall normally be 172.016.nnn.001 (the VPN Router).

NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).

IP Gateway (0..255 in each field)

06/IPGW/...............

06/MAC/hh-hh-hh Setup MAC Address

Sets up the MAC Physical address of the Ethernet Port.

The 3 entered bytes are the least significant bytes.

The 3 most significant bytes are automaticalle set to

00h+0Fh+E3h, the OUI for Damm Cellular Systems A/S.

The value is setup in factory and should never be changed.

Shall be setup at change of Flash IC on Main Board.

NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).

NB: Command only available from Console.

Last bytes of MAC Address

06/MAC/..-..-..

06/10MBIT/s Change 10MBit/s Forced Flag

Forces the speed on the Ethernet Port to 10MBit/s.

Default value is 10MBit/s to allow for up to 150m LAN cable.

If the length of the LAN cable is less than 100m, the flag can be

cleared to allow autonegotiation to 100MBit/s.

Value is saved in Flash on Main Board

NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).

Ethernet Port 10MBit forced flag

+: Forced 10MBit/s

-: Autoselect 10/100 MBit/s

06/10MBIT/.

Command description:

Page 10 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Date/Time:

07 DATE/TIME

07 Display Current Local Date/Time

07

07/S Display Date/Time status

07/S

07/T Display DSP TETRA Counters

07/T

Command description:

Page 11 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX Key:

10 TX KEY

10 Display TX key state

10

10+ Turn on TX

Operator blocking necessary

10+

10- Turn off TX

Operator blocking necessary

10-

10/T Display timeslot key

Only available in Tetra mode

10/T

10/T/ssss Change TX timeslot key

Operator blocking necessary

Only available in Tetra mode

Timeslot 1 key (+,-)

Timeslot 2 key (+,-)

Timeslot 3 key (+,-)

Timeslot 4 key (+,-)

10/T/....

10/AUTO Display Auto TX-off mode

Only significant in Tetra mode without Operator Blocking

10/AUTO

10/AUTO/c Change Auto TX-off mode

Has priority over control from L3

Only significant in Tetra mode without Operator Blocking

L3 control is default

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

-: Controlled of L3

D: Automatic TX-off disabled

C: Automatic Carrier-off (TX-off if all Timeslots idle)

T: Automatic Timeslot-off (TX-off of idle Timeslots)

10/AUTO/.

Command description:

Page 12 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX Output Power:

11 DISPLAY TX OUTPUT AND REFLECTED POWER

11 Display TX output and reflected power

11

Command description:

Page 13 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX Current/Power consumption:

12 DISPLAY TX CURRENT/POWER CONSUMPTION

12 Display TX Current/Power consumption

12

12/P Display PA Power

12/P

Command description:

Page 14 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX Output Power selection:

13 TX OUTPUT POWER SELECTION

13 Display TX output power selection

13

13/+nn.n Change TX Normal Output Power setting

Normal TX Output Power in TETRA mode

This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated

For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power

For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

Normal Output power setting (27.0 to 40.0 dBm)

13/+....

13/MIN Set TX Normal Output Power to Minimum

Normal TX Output Power in TETRA mode

This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated

For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power

For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

13/MIN

13/MAX Set TX Normal Output Power to Maximum

Normal TX Output Power in TETRA mode

This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated

For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power

For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

13/MAX

13/RED/+nn.n Change Reduced TX Output Power setting

Reduced TX Output Power setting in TETRA mode

This value is used if Alarm 8 input is activated

Maxim Peak Envelope Power is 2.4 times (3.8dB) higher

For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power

For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

Reduced Output Power setting (27.0 to 40.0 dBm)

13/RED/+....

13/RED/MIN Set TX Reduced Output Power to Minimum

Reduced TX Output Power in TETRA mode

This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated

For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power

For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

13/RED/MIN

Page 15 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

13/RED/MAX Set TX Reduced Output Power to Maximum

Reduced TX Output Power in TETRA mode

This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated

For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power

For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

13/RED/MAX

Command description:

Page 16 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX PA DC Bias:

14 TX BIAS

14 Display TX Bias

14

14+ Select TX Bias Forced On

14+

14- Select TX Bias Off (DSP Controlled)

14-

Command description:

Page 17 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX modulation:

15 Display TX test modulation selection

15

15/ZERO Select zero modulation

I and Q DAC set to zero (with zero offset compensation)

15/ZERO

15/CW Select CW modulation

Power level as in Analog Mode (5/6 of PEP)

15/CW

15/CW/PEP Select CW modulation PEP value

Power level is PEP-value of selected power

15/CW/PEP

15/CW/cs Select CW modulation

I: I DAC output

Q: Q DAC output

+: Positive DAC output

-: Negative DAC output

15/CW/..

15/CW/IQ/snnnnn/snnnnn Select CW modulation with I/Q values

NB: I and Q values are modified with power setting and I/Q-zero

and quadrature settings before reaching the DACs.

I-value (-32768..+32767)

Q-value (-32768..+32767)

15/CW/IQ/....../......

15/PRBS9 Select TETRA PRBS-9 modulation

15/PRBS9

15/PRBS15 Select TETRA PRBS-15 modulation

15/PRBS15

15/DSB/c/n Select DSB modulation

I: I generated DSB modulation

Q: Q generated DSB modulation

2: 2.25 kHz

4: 4.50 kHz

9: 9.00 kHz

15/DSB/./.

Page 18 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

15/cSB/n Select SSB modulation

L: LSB (Lower Side Band)

U: USB (Upper Side Band)

2: 2.25 kHz

4: 4.50 kHz

9: 9.00 kHz

15/.SB/.

15/FM/3 Select FM 1kHz +/-3kHz

15/FM/3

15/MULTI Select DSB multitone modulation

15/MULTI

15/PH45 Select TETRA +/-45deg. modulation

15/PH45

Page 19 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX modulation filter:

16 TX FILTER

16 Display TX filter type

16

16/n Change TX filter type

TX filter type

0: TETRA 25kHz ch. spacing

1: Flat (for test)

16/.

Command description:

Page 20 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX status:

17 Display TX status

17

Page 21 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX Cartesial Loop:

18 TX CARTESIAN LOOP

18 Display TX cartesian loop selections

18

18- Select open cartesian loop

18-

18+ Select closed cartesian loop

18+

18/P TX cartesian loop phase measurement

18/P

18/A TX cartesian loop phase/ampl. measurement

18/A

18/FREQ TX cartesian loop phase vs frequency measurement

18/FREQ

18/PWR TX cartesian loop phase vs. power measurement

18/PWR

18/LIN TX linearity measurement

Measures TX delta Gain and delta Phase

at output power change from +27dBm to +40dBm

18/LIN

18/ADJ TX cartesian open loop phase adjust

WARNING: Factory adjust command, factory unlock necessary

Changes same parameter as the 91/PH0/snnn command

18/ADJ

Command description:

Page 22 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX utility commands:

19 TX UTILITY COMMANDS

19 Display command function

19

19/F Display TX PLL voltage vs frequency

Operator blocking necessary

19/F

19+ Switch TX on and off

Operator blocking necessary

19+

19/nnnn Switch TX channel to nnnn and back again

Operator blocking necessary

NB: TX is turned on and off at both channels

TX channel number

19/....

Command description:

Page 23 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX Local Oscillators:

20 RX LO

20 Display RX LO status

20

Command description:

Page 24 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX RSSI:

21 DISPLAY RX RSSI

21 Display RX RSSI

With 5 msec. settling time

21

21/c Display RX RSSI

RSSI option

0: 100 msec. settling time

1: 1 sec. settling time

21/.

21/NF Display RX Noise Figure

Displays the RSSI value as equivalent Noise Figure

The reference depends on the actual IF filter

bandwidth, see the 26 command

21/NF

21/FFT Display FFT result

NB: Select RX-A or RX-B with the 25/FFT/c command

21/FFT

21/FFT/A Display FFT Adjust results

NB: Select RX-A or RX-B FFT with the 25/FFT/c command

Response is:

-nnn.n :-6.75 kHz [dBm]

-nnn.n :-2.25 kHz [dBm]

-nnn.n : 0.00 kHz [dBm]

-nnn.n :+2.25 kHz [dBm]

-nnn.n :+6.75 kHz [dBm]

21/FFT/A

21/FREQ Display RX Signal Frequency Offset

NB: Select RX-A or RX-B with the 25/FREQ/c command

21/FREQ

Command description:

Page 25 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX Diversity:

22 RX DIVERSITY

22 Display RX diversity selection

22

22/A A-forced RX diversity selection

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

22/A

22/B B-forced RX diversity selection

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

22/B

22- Automatic RX diversity selection

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

22-

Command description:

Page 26 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX Antenna test:

23 RX ANTENNA TEST

23 Display command function

23

23+ RX antenna measurement command

23+

Command description:

Page 27 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX-B Input:

24 RX-B INPUT

24 Display RX-B Input Selection

24

24+ Select RX-B input Cascaded

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

24+

24- Deselect RX-B input Cascaded

NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File

24-

Command description:

Page 28 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX demodulation mode:

25 Display RX test demodulation mode

25

25/PM Select PM demodulation

25/PM

25/FFT/A Select RX-A FFT demodulation

25/FFT/A

25/FFT/B Select RX-B FFT demodulation

25/FFT/B

25/FREQ/A Select RX-A Frequency Measurement

25/FREQ/A

25/FREQ/B Select RX-B Frequency Measurement

25/FREQ/B

Page 29 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX IF filter:

26 RX FILTER

26 Display RX filter selection

26

26/n Change RX filter type

RX filter type

0: TETRA 25kHz ch. spacing

1: PM 25kHz ch. spacing (+/-7.5kHz)

2: PM 25kHz ch. spacing interleaved (+/-6.5kHz)

3: PM 20kHz ch. spacing (+/-6kHz)

4: PM 12.5kHz ch. spacing (+/-3.75kHz)

5: PM 6.25kHz ch. spacing (+/-1.9kHz)

6: Flat (for test)

26/.

Command description:

Page 30 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX Signal Display:

27 RX SIGNAL DISPLAY COMMANDS

27 Display command function

27

27/CP/c Display TETRA Constellation Points

RX path:

A: RX-A

B: RX-B

27/CP/.

27/ADC Display ADC peak-peak input levels

27/ADC

Command description:

Page 31 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX adjust commands:

28 RX ADJUST COMMANDS

28 Display command function

28

28/LO Display LO1 injection

28/LO

28/BPF Display RSSI vs. Frequency

Can be used for RX BPF adjustment

Uses TX + RFTL as signal source

28/BPF

Command description:

Page 32 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RX utility commands:

29 RX UTILITY COMMANDS

29 Display command function

29

29/F Display RX PLL voltage vs frequency

29/F

29/nnnn Switch RX to channel nnnn and back again

Operator blocking necessary

RX channel number

29/....

Command description:

Page 33 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Channel/Frequency:

30 CHANNEL COMMANDS

30 Display RX+TX channel numbers and frequencies

30

30/F Display Hardware Frequency Range

30/F

30/nnnn Change RX+TX channel number

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

Channel number

30/....

30/R/nnnn Change RX channel number

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

RX channel number

30/R/....

30/T/nnnn Change TX channel number

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

TX channel number

30/T/....

30/R/nnn.nnnnnn Change RX frequency

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

Frequency [MHz]

30/R/..........

30/T/nnn.nnnnnn Change TX frequency

The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command

Frequency [MHz]

30/T/..........

Command description:

Page 34 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Synchronization

31 OCXO SYNCHRONIZATION

31 Display Sync status

31

31/IN Display Sync Input status

31/IN

31/IN/c Change Sync Input selection

-: Auto Select

F: Forced Free Running

G: Forced GPS RX Lock

1: Forced External 1 Lock

2: Forced External 2 Lock

31/IN/.

31/SET Set OCXO Free Run adjust value to current DAC value

31/SET

31/SET/nn.nnn Set OCXO Free Run value

00.000 to 99.999 [%]

31/SET/......

31/SAVE Save OCXO Free Run adjust value in Flash

31/SAVE

31/PPS Display 1 PPS inputs

31/PPS

31/HIST Display OCXO Sync history

31/HIST

31/STEP/nn.nnn Simulate a PLL Frequency Step

00.000 to 99.999 [%]

31/STEP/......

Command description:

Page 35 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

RFTL:

32 Display RFTL selection

32

32+ Turn on RFTL Forward

32+

32/B Turn on RFTL Backward

32/B

32- Turn off RFTL

32-

32/nnn Select RFTL Forward Level

122 to 104 [-dBm]

32/...

32/ATT Display RFTL Attenuator value

32/ATT

Page 36 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Duplex Filter:

33 DUPLEX FILTER

33 Display Duplex Filter Selection

33

33+ Select Duplex Filter

33+

33- Deselect Duplex Filter

To be selected during test, when no Duplex Filter is attached

Modifies the following item:

1) Disables channel range check against Duplex Filter limits

2) Disables RSSI compensation for Duplex Filter Loss

3) Disables RX Antenna Return Loss measurement compensation

for Duplex Filter Loss

4) Disables TX Power Meter compensation for Duplex Filter Loss

33-

Command description:

Page 37 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

CMoIP:

34 CMoIP

34 Display all CMoIP Connections

34

34/n Display one CMoIP Connection

Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

34/.

34/n/... CMoIP Multicast Connect

Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

Multicast IP Address

34/./...............

34/n/REL CMoIP Multicast Release

Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

34/./REL

34/C Clear CMoIP Downlink Statistics Couters

34/C

34/Q Display CMoIP DSP queues

34/Q

Command description:

Page 38 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

MAC

43 MAC

43 Display Command Function

43

43/CONST/n/c Display Constellation Points

Tetra Timeslot Number (1..4)

A: RX A

B: RX B

43/CONST/./.

43/LMAC Display LMAC Message Statistics

43/LMAC

43/LMAC/C Clear LMAC Message Counter

43/LMAC/C

Command description:

Page 39 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

BSC Message Count:

47 BSC MESSAGE COUNT

47 Display BSC message count

47

47/C Clear BSC message count

47/C

Command description:

Page 40 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Message Trace:

48 MESSAGE TRACE

48 Display message trace

48

48+ Start Trace of all TS to UDP

48+

48- Stop Trace of all TS to UDP

48-

48/UDP/+ Activate trace output to UDP

UDP output counter will be cleared

48/UDP/+

48/UDP/- Stop trace output to UDP

48/UDP/-

48/UDP/nnn... Change trace UDP address+port

UDP IP address

UDP port number (default 42397)

48/UDP/.............../.....

48/FILE/+ Open trace output file

File will be cleared if existing

File output counter will be cleared

48/FILE/+

48/FILE/- Close trace output file

48/FILE/-

48/FILE/cc..c Change trace filename

File will be closed if open

NB: TR shall have write access permission to the file location

Filename (e.g. \CF-Card\Tetra\Work\Trace1.lan)

48/FILE/.........................................................

48/n/c Start/Stop Timeslot Trace

NB: If encryption is not used, the two Test Points are identical

Timeslot number (1..4)

Test Point

-: Stop Trace

U: Unencrypted (above UMAC encryption/decryption)

E: Encrypted (LMAC/UMAC interface)

48/./.

Page 41 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

48/C Clear Trace Counters

48/C

Command description:

The 48 Commands controls the the build-in Signalling Trace functionality.

For each of the 4 Tetra timeslots a testpoint can be activated to make it

possible to monitor Downlink and Uplink traffic p† the Transceiver, either

below or above Air Interface Encryption.

The output from the Test Points can be output realtime in UDP messages, and can

also be written to a file, either on the BS421 or on a remote Computer.

The output can be analyzed with the Tetra Protocol Analyzer from fjord-e-

design.

Page 42 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Tetra Channel Test:

49 TETRA CHANNEL TEST

49 Display Tetra channel test selection

49

49/nn/n Activate Tetra channel test

Uplink test point channel types:

07: TCH/7.2

08: SCH/F

09: STCH

10: TCH/2.4 N=1

11: SCH/HU

16: TCH/S

18: TCH/4.8 N=1

Downlink test point channel types:

57: TCH/7.2

60: TCH/2.4 N=1

66: TCH/S

68: TCH/4.8 N=1

Timeslot (1..4)

49/../.

49- Stop Tetra channel test

49-

49/c Change Sync Mode

A: PRBS Auto Sync

M: PRBS Forced Multiframe Sync

T: PRBS Forced Timeslot Sync

49/.

49/CNTR Display Counters

49/CNTR

49/CLEAR Clear Counter Values

49/CLEAR

49/DATA Display Received Data

49/DATA

Command description:

The 49 commands controls the BS421 build-in TETRA channel test features.

When channel test is activated, a test point at the output from or input to

the receiver is selected. Received bursts including status will be analyzed

and BER/MER calculated.

Page 43 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

When channel test is activated, the BS421 TX switches to uplink mode and

generates the selected channel type. When TX is keyed and RFTL activated,

an RX input signal can be generated for the testing.

Alternatively, a test signal can be generated from an external source, e.g.

an R&S SMIQ or Anritsu signal generator

The uplink test point is intended for normal receiver channel tests.

The downlink test point is intented for test of received traffic from the

lines.

Page 44 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

DC Voltmeter:

60 DC VOLTMETER

60 Display DC test points

60

60/nn Display one DC test point

TP number (00..19)

60/..

60/T Display temperature

60/T

60/ADC Display voltmeter ADC values

60/ADC

Command description:

Description:

The command displays the DC voltage on one of the DC test points.

The displayed reading is taken from a RAM register array, which is updated

every 24/1000 sec. Therefore, some delay can be necessary in connection

with automatic test equipment.

Page 45 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

DSP:

61 Display DSP state

61

61- Stop DSP execution

Activates DSP hardware reset

61-

61+ Restart DSP

Makes:

1) Hardware reset on

2) Hardware reset off

3) DSP memory clear

4) DSP code installation

5) Interface register init

6) Program execution start

61+

61/B Select DSP Boot State

Makes:

1) Hardware reset on

2) Hardware reset off

Afterward, manual R/W can be done

61/B

61/S Select DSP Setup State

Makes:

1) Hardware reset on

2) Hardware reset off

3) DSP memory clear

4) DSP code installation

5) Interface register init

Afterward, manual R/W and program execution start can be done

61/S

61/R Start DSP program run

DSP booted state necessary

61/R

61/hhhhhhhh Display DSP memory word

DSP memory address (Hex 32-bit aligned)

61/........

61/hhhhhhh0/1 Display DSP memory 8-bit wise

DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/1

Page 46 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

61/hhhhhhh0/2 Display DSP memory 16-bit wise

DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/2

61/hhhhhhh0/4 Display DSP memory 32-bit wise

DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/4

61/hhhhhhhh/hhhhhhhh Change DSP memory

DSP memory address (Hex 32-bit aligned)

Data to write (Hex)

61/......../........

61/REG/nn Display DSP interface registers

1st register to display (00..48)

61/REG/..

61/REG/nn/nn Display DSP interface registers

1st register to display (00..48)

Number of registers to display (01..48)

61/REG/../..

61/HPIA/hhhhhhhh DSP HPIA write/read test

NB: Bit 1+0 always read 0

Value to write to HPIA (hex)

61/HPIA/........

61/HPIC Display HPI Control Register

61/HPIC

Page 47 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

CPLD:

62 Display CPLD version

62

Page 48 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Internal GPS:

63 INTERNAL GPS

63 Display Internal GPS Status

63

63/VER Display GPS Module Version

63/VER

63/N Display next Internal GPS message

Hint: Use the C/63/N command to display continuously

63/N

63/SETUP Setup GPS RX Module

Setup the Internal GPS RX Module and saves the configuration in GPS RX flash

This command shall be executed when an GPS RX module is installed first time

63/SETUP

63/SEND/cc..c Send Command to GPS RX Module

This command is for testing only

NMEA command

63/SEND/....................................................................

63/RESET/s GPS RX Module Reset

This command is for testing only

GPS RX Reset:

+: Turn on reset

-: Turn off reset

63/RESET/.

Command description:

Page 49 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Message Test Queue:

65 MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

65 Display BSC Link Connection status

65

65/N Display next message

65/N

65/C Clear test queue

65/C

65/S Set test queue to start

65/S

65/s Message display suppress control

+: Display all messages

-: Suppress 70h+F0h messages (default)

65/.

65/c/hh/hh..hh Send message

Destination

0: Active BSC

1: BSC1

2: BSC2

ID of Message (00h..FFh)

Optional Data (hex)

0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

65/./../..................................................................

Command description:

Page 50 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Host Performance:

66 HOST CPU PERFORMANCE

66 Display Host CPU task load

66

66/C Clear Host CPU Load Peak Hold

66/C

66/T Display 1msec. Timer

66/T

66/Q Display QPC Counter

66/Q

Command description:

Page 51 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Real Time Clock:

68 RTC NVRAM

68 Display RTC NVRAM

68

68/hh/hh Change RTC NVRAM

NVRAM Address [00..FFh]

NVRAM Data [00..FFh]

68/../..

Command description:

Page 52 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Host Memory:

69 HOST MEMORY

69 Display command function

69

69/hhhhhhhh Display Host memory word

Host memory address (Hex 32-bit aligned)

69/........

69/hhhhhhh0/1 Display Host memory 8-bit wise

Host memory address (hex)

69/.......0/1

69/hhhhhhh0/2 Display Host memory 16-bit wise

Host memory address (hex)

69/.......0/2

69/hhhhhhh0/4 Display Host memory 32-bit wise

Host memory address (hex)

69/.......0/4

69/hhhhhhhh/hhhhhhhh Change Host memory

Host memory address (Hex 32-bit aligned)

Data to write (Hex)

69/......../........

Command description:

Page 53 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

System configuration:

70 Display command function

70

70/SAVE Save System Configuration

File: \CF-Card\Tetra\Data\ConfigSys.txt

NB: From version 7.50 all changes are saved automatically

70/SAVE

Page 54 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Common system configuration:

71 Display Common System configuration

71

71/ID/cc..c Change TR ID String

TR ID String

71/ID/................................

71/TRADDR/nn Change TR Address

TR Address (11..48)

71/TRADDR/..

71/MSGPORT/nnnnn Change Local Message Port Number

Local Message Port Number (00000..65535, default 42391)

71/MSGPORT/.....

71/BSC/n/s Change BSC Configuration

BSC number (1..2)

BSC Configuration Flag

+: Select BSC

-: Deselect BSC

71/BSC/./.

71/BSC/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Change BSC IP Address

BSC number (1..2)

IP Address

71/BSC/./...............

71/BSC/n/s Change BSC Connection Protocol

BSC number (1..2)

BSC Connection Protocol

U: UDP

S: TCP Server (BSC shall be Client)

C: TCP Client (Default) (BSC shall be Server)

71/BSC/./.

71/BSC/n/nnnnn Change BSC Remote Port Number

BSC number (1..2)

Port Number (00000..65535, default 42392)

71/BSC/./.....

Page 55 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

71/CMOIP/BSS/s Change CMoIP to BSS selection

CMoIP Selection

-: CMoIP Multicast

+: CMoIP to BSS

71/CMOIP/BSS/.

71/CMOIP/BSS/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Change CMoIP BSS IP Address

Active BSC number (1..2)

IP Address

71/CMOIP/BSS/./...............

71/TXREFLWAR/c Change TX Reflected Alarm selection

Can be set to avoid blocking alarm at poor TX antenna

Blocking Alarm:

Should normally be selected.

Will the TR with bad antenna out of operation

Ensures startup of MCCH on another TR

Warning-only Alarm:

Can be selected for single carrier systems

Can be selected if there is a risk, that all antennas

are bad (e.g. ice on antennas)

-: TX Reflected Blocking Alarm (default)

+: TX Reflected Warning-only alarm

71/TXREFLWAR/.

Page 56 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Synchronization configurations

72 Synchronisation

72 Display Sync selection

72

72/MASTER/c Change Master Priority

Changes the Synchronization Priority for the BS

Master 1 shall be selected for the Primary Master in a cell.

Master 2 shall be selected for the Backup Master in a cell.

Master 0 shall only be selected if the BS is Global Master used to

synchronize other cells.

Warning: The Master selections shall be unique within a Radio Cell

0: Master 0 (For Global Master) (Highest Priority)

1: Master 1 (For Primary Master in a Cell)

2: Master 2

3: Master 3

4: Master 4 (Lowest Priority)

S: Slave

72/MASTER/.

72/CENTSECOFS/snnnnnnnnnn Change Century Second offset

Used to change the Century Second offset, where all TETRA counters started

For standard Damm TetraFlex this value shall be 0.

Century Second Offset

DAMM: +0000000000 [2000-01-01 00:00:00 UTC]

EADS: +0031536013 [1999-01-01 00:00:00 GPS]

72/CENTSECOFS/...........

72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM Change Century Second offset to DAMM

Used to clear Century Seconds offset for DAMM timing

Value: 0 for 2000-01-01 00:00:00 UTC

72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM

72/CENTSECOFS/EADS Change Century Second offset to EADS

Used to setup the Centrury Seconds offset for EADS timing

Value: +31536013 (1 year + 13 leap seconds) for 1999-01-01 00:00:00 GPS

72/CENTSECOFS/EADS

72/GPSRXOFS/snnn.n Change GPS RX offset

Used to change the GPS RX time offset

For standard Damm TetraFlex this value shall be 0.

GPS RX offset

DAMM: +000.0 [usec.]

EADS: +111.1 [usec.]

72/GPSRXOFS/......

Page 57 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM Change GPS RX offset to DAMM

Used to clear the GPS RX offset for DAMM timing

Value: +000.0 userc.

72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM

72/GPSRXOFS/EADS Change GPS RX offset to EADS

Used to setup the GPS RX offset for EADS timing

Value: -055.6 usec.

72/GPSRXOFS/EADS

72/IN/n/s Activate/Deactivate Sync Input

Input

G: GPS RX

1: Ext. 1

2: Ext. 2

Activate/Deactivate

+: Configured

-: Not configured

72/IN/./.

72/IN/n/... Setup External Sync Input

Input

1: External 1

2: External 2

Primary Flag

-: Not Primary Input (Normal)

+: Primary Input (For Remote Primary Reference only)

IP Address (000..255)

Cable Delay in usec. (000.0..999.9)

72/IN/././.............../.....

72/OUT Display Sync Message Output Table

72/OUT

72/OUT/... Add/Remove Sync Message Output

All units connected to the 1PPS output shall be added here

Max. 30 IP Addresses can be configured

Outputs are NOT active if Sync Slave Priority

IP Address (000..255)

Action:

+: Add

-: Remove

72/OUT/.............../.

Command description:

The TETRA Base Station TR's need to be time synchronized to operate correctly.

Most importantly, all TR's in a radio cell shall be time synchronized together

to

Page 58 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

ensure correct timing for the mobiles, when switching from the control channel

to

a traffic channel on another TR.

For a multi-cell systems, all radio cells are also recommended to be time

synchronized together

to enable use of seamless handover (cell re-selection).

The Damm BS system is provided with a flexible system to provide

synchronization

between individual Transceivers. Build-in GPS Receivers give absolute time

synchronization to the radio cells. External Inputs can also be marked as

Primary

Sync References.

When a BS is Network locked, automatic frequency correction of the Master

Oscillator (RX and TX carrier frequencies) are provided, and Seamless Handover

to

other Network Synchronized Cells are activated.

The BS can be setup to run as either Sync Master 0..4 or Slave. The Masters

shall preferably be provided with GPS antennas or an External Primary Sync

source.

The remaining BS's shall be setup as Slave and do not need a GPS antenna.

The BS421 is provided with one External 1PPS (1 Pulse Per Second) output and

two external 1PPS inputs. The Slaves shall have their external 1PPS inputs

connected to Masters.

In addition to the hardware 1PPS, sync messages are send every second on IP

from the Masters to attached BS's.

A Master will indicate Master Mode, if:

1) Synchronized to the internal GPS RX or

2) Synchronized to an External Input marked as Primary and indicating

Master Mode

Master 0 priority:

1) Int. GPS RX

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 1, Resync-only

7) Ext. Master 2, Resync-only

8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only

9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only

10)Int. Free-Run

Master 1 priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Int. GPS RX

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

Page 59 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 2, Resync-only

8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only

9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only

10)Int. Free-Run

Master 2 priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Int. GPS RX

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 1

8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only

9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only

10)Int. Free-Run

Master 3 priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

4) Int. GPS RX

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 1

8) Ext. Master 2

9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only

10)Int. Free-Run

Master 4 priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Int. GPS RX

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 1

8) Ext. Master 2

9) Ext. Master 3

10)Int. Free-Run

Slave priority:

1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode

2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode

5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode

6) Ext. Master 0

7) Ext. Master 1

8) Ext. Master 2

9) Ext. Master 3

Page 60 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

10)Ext. Master 4

11)Int. GPS RX

12)Int. Free-Run

If no GPS synchronized Master or higher prioritized free-running Master is

available at re-start, Masters will try initially to synchronize to lower

prioritized free-running Masters.

A BS will resync automatically after a short time, if Century Second

and Phase Detector are out of sync with a valid sync source.

Masters shall be setup even if GPS antennas are not used and internal GPS RX

are deselected, to ensure proper synchronization between all TR's.

Typical 1-carrier BS421 configuration:

TR11: Master 1

Typical 2-carrier BS421 configuration:

TR11: Master 1

TR12: Master 2

TR11-OUT connected to TR12-IN1

TR12-OUT connected to TR11-IN1

Typical 3 o4 4-carrier BS421 configuration:

TR11: Master 1 (Powered of SB421-1)

TR12: Slave (Powered of SB421-1)

TR13: Master 2 (Powered of SB421-2)

TR14: Slave (Powered of SB421-2)

TR11-OUT connected to TR12-IN1, TR13-IN1 and TR14-IN1

TR13-OUT connected to TR11-IN1, TR12-IN2 and TR14-IN2

Page 61 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Factory configuration:

90 Display factory lock status

90

90/FACTORYUNLOCK Select factory configuration unlock

UNLOCK

90/FACTORY......

90- Deselect factory configuration unlock

90-

90/CNFG Return current Factory Configuration

90/CNFG

90/FLASH Return Factory Configuration in Flash

90/FLASH

90/SAVE Save Factory Configuration in Flash

90/SAVE

90/CLEAR Clear Flash Factory Configuration

90/CLEAR

Page 62 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TX factory configuration:

91 TX SETTINGS

91 Display TX factory configuration

91

91/PWRADJ/n.nnn Change TX Output Power

0.700..1.400

91/PWRADJ/.....

91/BIASDR/nnn Change TX Driver Bias

000..255

91/BIASDR/...

91/BIASPA/nnn Change TX PA Bias

000..255

91/BIASPA/...

91/IZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop I-zero

-9999..+9999

91/IZEROOL/.....

91/QZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop Q-zero

-9999..+9999

91/QZEROOL/.....

91/LOOPGAIN/nnn Change Loop Gain

Used to reduce DAC output level at open loop

010..200

91/LOOPGAIN/...

91/QAMPL/n.nnnn Change TX Q-amplitude balance

0.9000..1.1000

91/QAMPL/......

91/QPHASE/sn.nnnn Change TX Q-phase quadrature

-0.2500..+0.2500

91/QPHASE/.......

Page 63 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

91/PH0/nnn Select Cartesian Loop channel 0 phase adjust value

Channel 0 phase adjust value in degree (000..359)

91/PH0/...

91/PHSTEP/snnn Change Cartesian Loop channel phase step value

Typical value:

400MHz: +055

800MHz: +030

Phase change per channel in millidegree (-999..+999)

91/PHSTEP/....

91/ZERO Display TX carrier zero adjust table

91/ZERO

91/ZERO/nnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table channel step

Value shall be max. channel number divided by 8

Normal value for 400MHz range: 200 (1600/8)

Normal value for 800MHz range: 400 (3200/8)

Number of channels between table entries (010..500)

91/ZERO/...

91/ZERO/n/snnnn/snnnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table value

Table entry position (0..8)

I zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)

Q zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)

91/ZERO/./...../.....

91/PMOUT/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter output setting

0.700..1.400

91/PMOUT/.....

91/PMREFL/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter reflected setting

0.700..1.400

91/PMREFL/.....

Command description:

Page 64 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Common factory configuration:

93 COMMON SETTINGS

93 Display common factory settings

93

93/CHIFOFS/snnnn Change 1st LO IF channel offset

Value shall be (1st IF frequency)/6.25kHz

Typical value: -7200 for -45MHz

1st LO IF offset (-9999..+9999)

-45MHz: -7200

93/CHIFOFS/.....

93/CHRX0/nnnnnn Change RX channel zero

Value shall be (RX channel 0 frequency)/6.25kHz

RX channel 0

300MHz: 048000

350MHz: 056000

380MHz: 060800

410MHz: 065600

450MHz: 072000

805MHz: 128800

93/CHRX0/......

93/CHTX0/nnnnnn Change TX channel zero

Value shall be (TX channel 0 frequency)/6.25kHz

TX channel 0

336MHz: 053760

360MHz: 057600

390MHz: 062400

420MHz: 067200

460MHz: 073600

850MHz: 136000

93/CHTX0/......

93/CHTRMIN/nnnn Change lowest Transceiver channel number

Normal setting: 0000

Channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHTRMIN/....

93/CHTRMAX/nnnn Change highest Transceiver channel number

Normal 400MHz setting: 1600

Normal 800MHz setting: 3200

Channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHTRMAX/....

Page 65 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

93/CHDFMIN/nnnn Change lowest Duplex Filter channel number

Normal value for 400MHz with 5MHz bandwidth:

Low band : 0000

High band: 0800

Normal value for 800MHz with 14MHz bandwidth:

Low band : 0000

High band: 0960

Channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHDFMIN/....

93/CHDFMAX/nnnn Change highest Duplex Filter channel number

Normal value for 400MHz with 5MHz bandwidth:

Low band : 0800

High band: 1600

Normal value for 800MHz with 14MHz bandwidth:

Low band : 2240

High band: 3200

Channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHDFMAX/....

93/DFTXLOSS/n.n Duplex Filter TX Path Loss

Loss in dB [0.0..3.0]

93/DFTXLOSS/...

93/DFRXALOSS/n.n Duplex Filter RX-A Path Loss

Loss in dB [0.0..3.0]

93/DFRXALOSS/...

93/DFRXBLOSS/n.n Duplex Filter RX-B Path Loss

Loss in dB [0.0..3.0]

93/DFRXBLOSS/...

93/SYNCEXT2/c Sync External 2 input selection

Shall be set according to actual hardware configuration

BS421 LAN Cable Second Out/In2:

A: Auto select

-: Out (Soldered jumper)

+: In2 (Soldered jumper)

93/SYNCEXT2/.

Page 66 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

93/GPSRX/c GPS RX Type selection

Shall be set to installed GPS Receiver type

GPS RX type:

2: iTrax02 (default)

3: iTrax03

6: IT600

93/GPSRX/.

Command description:

Page 67 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

Hardware identity:

98 HARDWARE ID

98 Display Hardware Identity

98

98/ITEM/cc..c Change item number

Item number

98/ITEM/................

98/SER/cc..c Change serial number

Serial number

98/SER/................

98/VER/cc..c Change version number

Version number

98/VER/................

98/REV/cc..c Change revisions

Revisions

98/REV/................

98/DFSER/cc..c Change Duplex Filter Serial No.

Duplex Filter Serial No.

98/DFSER/................

Command description:

Page 68 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.60 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2012-11-02

TR421 Control Commands

99 TR421 CONTROL COMMANDS

99 Display command function

99

99/STOP Stop TR421 service

Makes a normal shutdown of the service

99/STOP

99/RESTART Restart TR421 service

Makes:

1) Shutdown of TR421 Service

2) Copy of TR421.dll to TR421..dll

3) Startup of TR421 Service again

99/RESTART

99/HWRESET Make BS421 Hardware Reset

Uses Watchdog in RTC

99/HWRESET

Command description:

Page 69 of 69Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Functional Description

PS411 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the PS411 Power Supply consist of 2-digits in the range 00 to 99 with an

optionally parameter. Commands without parameters are display-only commands and will not make

any change.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in the 00 to 99 range, an error message

will be displayed:

Invalid PS411 command

This is however not the case if the first character is a + , which are reserved for commands to the test

box. In this case no response will be sent.

If an unimplemented command is made, the following response is displayed:

Unimplemented PS411 command

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used as parameter to turn off,

disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command number followed by the

necessary number of characters for the actual function.

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response is displayed: Invalid parameter

SETTINGS

Calibration and system parameters are stored residently in the micro- processors built-in EEPROM. If

the programming succeeded, the following response is displayed:

Setting stored in EEPROM

If a failure during programming is detected, the following response is displayed: EEPROM programming error

Warning: The any EEPROM byte is only guaranteed accept erasure and reprogram- ming up to 10.000

times. Do not use the O&M Continuous and Repeat commands here.

Page 1 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

Address commands

ADDRESS COMMANDS

A Display address

A

Anc Select address

Cassette number (1..4)

Position number (a..g for posotion x1..x7)

A..

A++ Forced address select

Used to force UART address selection at factory test

NB: This command will not pass the BSC

A++

Command description:

Response:

1) Address: nc

Description:

The address commands are used to address the PS411

The 'A' command returns the PS411 address if the unit has previously been selected with a Anc

command.

The 'Anc' command selects the PS411 if nc both matches the address input pins. If match it returns the

address string.

The 'Anc' command deselects the PS411 if nc does not match the address input pins.

Page 2 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

General commands

00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER

00 Display software version number

00

Command description:

Response:

1) DAMM PS411 ver. 1.00

Description:

Displayes the software version number of the EPROM.

02 RESET

02 Display command function

02

02+ Execute software reset

Blocking necessary

02+

02++ Execute hardware reset

Blocking necessary

02++

Command description:

Description:

The reset commands are used to bring the PS411 back to a known state.

The 02+ software reset command forces the processor to start executing codes from the power-on reset

entry point. Complete initialization is made, except that blocking is maintained.

The 02++ hardware reset command will pull the CPU reset output low and make full hardware reset.

Note, that blocking will be off after hardware reset.

The hardware reset is made by stopping the trigging of the watchdog. Therefore 0.5 sec. will elapse from

the command until reset is made.

03 ALARM

03 Display alarm status

03

Page 3 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

03/C Alarm reset

03/C

Command description:

Page 4 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

Output commands

10 DISPLAY OUTPUT STATUS

10 Display output values

10

Command description:

11 14V OUTPUT CONTROL

11 Display 14V output selection

11

11- Turn off 14V output

11-

11+ Turn on 14V output

11+

Command description:

12 26V OUTPUT CONTROL

12 Display 26V output selection

12

12- Turn off 26V output

12-

12+ Turn on 26V output

12+

Command description:

Page 5 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

Rectifier commands

20 Display Rectifier status

20

21 Display Rectifier selection

21

21- Turn off Rectifier

21-

21+ Turn on Rectifier

21+

22 Display Rectifier manual voltage control selection

22

22+ Select Rectifer manual voltage control

22+

22- Deselect Rectifier manual voltage control

22-

23 Display Rectifier output voltage selection

23

23/nn.n Change Rectifier output voltage

Rectifier output voltage (46.0..58.7V)

23/....

Page 6 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

Battery charging commands

30 BATTERY STATUS

30 Display battery status

30

Command description:

Page 7 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

Test commands

60 TEMPERATURE

60 Display temperature

60

Command description:

63 TIMER

63 Display timer

63

Command description:

65 Display command function

65

65/N Display next message

65/N

65/C Clear test queue

65/C

65/hhhh..hh Send message to BSC

Message in hex

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5

ÿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿

65/......................................................................

65/L Enable loop-back reception

65/L

67 DISPLAY BOARD ADDRESS

67 Display Board Address

67

Command description:

69 READ MEMORY LOCATION

69 Display last selected memory address

69

Page 8 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

69/hhhh Display memory address hhhh

Memory address ($0000..$0FFF and $2000..$FFFF)

69/....

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) $hhhh=$hh Normal response

2) $hhhh=Protected $1000 to $1FFF address response

Description:

The command displays the content of a memory location. The I/O area $1000 to $1FFF is protected in

order not to disturb read handshake on I/O ports.

Page 9 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

System settings

70 SYSTEM SETTINGS

70 Display system settings

70

Command description:

71 AC INPUT

71 Display AC input selection

71

71s Change AC input selection

+: Select AC input

-: Deselect AC input

71.

71/EE++++ Save AC input selection in EEPROM

71/EE++++

Command description:

72 BATTERY CHARGING

72 Display Battery charging selection

72

72s Change Battery charging selection

+: Select Battery charging

-: Deselect Battery charging

72.

72/EE++++ Save Battery charging selection in EEPROM

72/EE++++

Command description:

73 BATTERY CHARGING VOLTAGE

73 Display Battery charging voltage selection

73

Page 10 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

73/nn.n Select Battery charging voltage

Battery charging voltage at 25 Celsius

Shall be selected according to the battery recommendation

Typical charging voltage is 54.OV (2.25V pr. cell)

Charging voltage at 25 Celsius (52.8..55.2)

73/....

73/EE++++ Save Battery charging voltage in EEPROM

73/EE++++

Command description:

74 BATTERY CHARGING TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION

74 Display Battery charging temperature compensation

74

74/-nnn Select Battery charging temperature compensation

Shall be selected according to the battery recommendation

Typical temperature compensation is -72 mV/C (-3.0mV/C per cell)

Charging temperature compensation in mV (-048..-120)

74/-...

74/EE++++ Save Battery charging temperature compensation in EEPROM

74/EE++++

Command description:

Page 11 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

Factory settings

90 FACTORY UNLOCK

90 Display factory unlock selection

90

90/UNLOCK Select factory unlock

90/UNLOCK

90- Deselect factory unlock

90-

Command description:

91 PS RECTIFIER SELECTION

91 Display PS Rectifier selection

91

91+ Select Rectifier included

91+

91- Select No Rectifier included

91-

Command description:

95 TYPE NUMBER

95 Display Item number

95

95/ccc..c Change Item number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Item number

95/............

Command description:

Response:

1) Item no.: cccccccccccc

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the item number.

The item number can consist of from 1 to 12 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the type

number on the type plate.

Page 12 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

96 TYPE NUMBER

96 Display Type number

96

96/ccc..c Change Type number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Type number

96/............

Command description:

Response:

1) Type no.: cccccccccccc

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the type number.

The type number can consist of from 1 to 12 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the type

number on the type plate.

97 SERIAL NUMBER

97 Display Serial number

97

97/nnnnnnnn Change serial number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Serial number (00000000..99999999)

97/........

Command description:

Response:

1) Serial no.: nnnnnnnn

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the serial number.

The serial number shall consist of 8 digits and shall be setup to be equal to the serial number on the type

plate.

98 VERSION NUMBER

98 Display Version number

98

Page 13 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2011-08-18

98/cc..c Change Version number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Version number

98/......

Command description:

Response:

1) Version no.: cccccc

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the version number.

The version number can consist of from 1 to 6 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the

version number on the type plate.

99 REVISION NUMBER

99 Display Revision number

99

99/cc..c Change Revision number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Revision number

99/......

Command description:

Response:

1) Revision no.: cccccc

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the revision number.

The revision number can consist of from 1 to 6 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the

revision number on the type plate.

Page 14 of 14Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Functional Description

PS421 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the PS421 Power Supply consist of 2-digit commands

in the range 00 to 99 with an optionally parameter. Commands without parameters

are display-only commands and will not make any change.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in

the 00 to 99 range, an error message will be displayed:

Invalid PS421 command

If an unimplemented command is executed, the following response is

displayed:

Unimplemented PS421 command

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used

as parameter to turn off, disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command

number followed by the necessary number of characters for the actual

function.

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response

is displayed:

Invalid parameter

SYSTEM AND FACTORY CONFIGURATIONS

The System and Factory Configurations are stored residently in the

microcontrollers

built-in Flash memory and read into RAM at power-up. The settings are changed

with

the 7x and 9x commands respectively and will becone effective immediately. The

changes

shall be saved with the 70/SAVE and 90/SAVE commands to be effective after a

re-boot.

To avoid accidentially change of Factory settings, change access is only

possible

after the Factory Unlock command 90/UNLOCK

Warning: The Flash is only guaranteed to be erasured and reprogrammed 10.000

times.

Do not use the O&M Continuous or Repeat commands here.

Page 1 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

General commands

00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER

00 Display software version number

00

Command description:

Response:

1) PS421 ver. 1.00

Description:

Displayes the software version number of the Flash.

02 RESET

02 Display command function

02

02+ Execute hardware reset

02+

Command description:

03 ALARMS

03 Display alarm flags

03

Command description:

Page 2 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

PS commands

10 DISPLAY PS STATUS

10 Display PS Status

10

Command description:

11 TR1/TR3 POWER-OFF

11 Display TR1/TR3 Power-Off Selection

For SB421 #1: TR1

For SB421 #2: TR3

11

11+ Turn On TR1/TR3 Power

For SB421 #1: TR1

For SB421 #2: TR3

11+

11- Turn Off TR1/TR3 Power

For SB421 #1: TR1

For SB421 #2: TR3

11-

Command description:

12 TR2/TR4 POWER-OFF

12 Display TR2/TR4 Power-Off Selection

For SB421 #1: TR2

For SB421 #2: TR4

12

12+ Turn On TR2/TR4 Power

For SB421 #1: TR2

For SB421 #2: TR4

12+

12- Turn Off TR2/TR4 Power

For SB421 #1: TR2

For SB421 #2: TR4

12-

Command description:

Page 3 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Rectifier commands

20 Display Rectifier status

20

21 Display Rectifier Off selection

21

21- Turn Off Rectifier

21-

21+ Turn On Rectifier

21+

22 Display Rectifier Manual Voltage Control selection

22

22+ Select Rectifer Manual Voltage Control

22+

22- Deselect Rectifier Manual Voltage Control

22-

23 Display Rectifier Output Voltage selection

23

23/nn.n Change Rectifier Output Voltage

Rectifier Output Voltage (48.0..59.0V)

23/....

24 Display Battery Super Charge Status

24

24/n.n/nnn Start Battery Super Charge

Command used to Charge Align Cells in Battery

Is recommended to do on a new Battery and once every year

Parameters shall be according to recommandation for Battery type

Do not use on small Batteries, if they are not able to handle continuous

charge with the max. output current of PS421.

Charge Voltage Increase (0.1V to 4.8V)(2.4V typ.)

Charge duration (001 to 999 minutes)

24/.../...

24- Stop Battery Super Charge

24-

Page 4 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Test commands

60 ADC VOLTMETER

60 Display ADC Result

60

Command description:

67 INPUT PORT

67 Display Input Port

Spare Input Port from Control Connector

67

Command description:

68 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

68 Display command function

68

68/BOOT Switch to Boot Mode

This Command sets the Program Update Request Flag and afterwards makes a

hardware reset of the Microcontroller. Afterwards the Microcontroller can

accept new download of new Program Code.

Download of new Program Code can either be done automatically from BSC421

or by executing the HEX file in the Editor of the TetraOM Program.

BOOT

68/....

Command description:

69 READ MEMORY LOCATION

69 Display last selected memory address

69

69/hhhh Display memory address hhhh

Memory address in HEX

69/....

Command description:

Page 5 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

System Configuration

70 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

70 Display System Configuration

70

70/SAVE Save System Configuration in Flash

70/SAVE

Command description:

71 AC INPUT

71 Display AC input selection

71

71s Change AC input selection

+: Select AC input

-: Deselect AC input

71.

Command description:

72 BATTERY CHARGING

72 Display Battery charging selection

72

72s Change Battery charging selection

+: Select Battery charging

-: Deselect Battery charging

72.

Command description:

73 BATTERY CHARGING VOLTAGE

73 Display Battery charging voltage selection

73

Page 6 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

73/nn.n Select Battery charging voltage

Battery charging voltage at 25 Celsius

Shall be selected according to the battery recommendation

Typical charging voltage is 54.OV (2.25V pr. cell)

Charging voltage at 25 Celsius (52.8..55.2)

73/....

Command description:

74 BATTERY CHARGING TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION

74 Display Battery charging temperature compensation

74

74/-nnn Select Battery charging temperature compensation

Shall be selected according to the battery recommendation

Typical temperature compensation is -72 mV/C (-3.0mV/C per cell)

Charging temperature compensation in mV (-048..-120)

74/-...

Command description:

Page 7 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Factory Configuration

90 FACTORY CONFIGURATION

90 Display Factory Configuration

90

90/D Display factory unlock selection

90/D

90/UNLOCK Select factory unlock

90/UNLOCK

90- Deselect factory unlock

90-

90/SAVE Save Factory Configuration in Flash

90/SAVE

Command description:

91 RECTIFIER SELECTION

91 Display Rectifier selection

91

91+ Select Rectifier included

Factory Unlock necessary

91+

91- Select No Rectifier included

Factory Unlock necessary

91-

Command description:

95 TYPE NUMBER

95 Display Item Number

95

95/ccc..c Change Item Number

Factory Unlock necessary

Item Number

95/............

Command description:

Page 8 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

96 TYPE NUMBER

96 Display Type Number

96

96/ccc..c Change Type Number

Factory Unlock necessary

Type Number

96/............

Command description:

97 SERIAL NUMBER

97 Display Serial Number

97

97/nnnnnnnn Change Serial Number

Factory Unlock necessary

Serial Number (00000000..99999999)

97/........

Command description:

98 VERSION NUMBER

98 Display Version Number

98

98/cc..c Change Version Number

Factory Unlock necessary

Version Number

98/......

Command description:

99 REVISION NUMBER

99 Display Revision Number

99

99/cc..c Change Revision Number

Factory Unlock necessary

Revision Number

99/......

Command description:

Page 9 of 9Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Functional Description

TCC411 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the TCC411 Transmitter Combiner Controller consist of 2-digits in the range 00

to 99 with an optionally parameter. Commands without parameters are display-only commands and will

not make any change.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in the 00 to 99 range, an error message

will be displayed:

Invalid TCC411 command

This is however not the case if the first character is a + , which are reser- ved for commands to the test

box. In this case no response will be sent.

If an unimplemented command is made, the following response is displayed:

Unimplemented TCC411 command

BLOCKING

After power-on, the TCC411 starts up in normal operating mode. Some commands requires blocking to

be available. If blocking has not been done,the follow- ing response is displayed:

Blocking necessary

Only commands with a parameter are protected. After activation of local blocking (01+), all the

commands are available, except calibration commands.

If a calibration command is executed and calibration unlock has not been done, the following response is

displayed:

Calibration unlock necessary

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used as parameter to turn off,

disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command number followed by the

necessary number of characters for the actual function.

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response is displayed: Invalid parameter

Page 1 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

SETTINGS

Calibration and system parameters are stored residently in the micro- processors built-in EEPROM. If

the programming succeeded, the following response is displayed:

Setting stored in EEPROM

If a failure during programming is detected, the following response is displayed: EEPROM programming error

Warning: The any EEPROM byte is only guaranteed accept erasure and reprogram- ming up to 10.000

times. Do not use the O&M Continuous and Repeat commands here.

Page 2 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Address commands

ADDRESS COMMANDS

A Display address

A

Anc Select address

TR Cassette number (1..4)

TX combiner module

A: TC for position 1..4

B: TC for position 5..8

A..

Command description:

Response:

1) Address: nc

Description:

The address commands are used to address the TCC411

The 'A' command returns the TCC411 address if the unit has previously been selected with a Anc

command.

The 'Anc' command selects the TCC411 if nc both matches the address input pins coming in the cable

from the transceiver cassette. If match it returns the address string.

The 'Anc' command deselects the TCC411 if nc does not match the address input pins.

Page 3 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

General commands

00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER

00 Display software version number

00

Command description:

Response:

1) DAMM TCC411 ver. 2.00

Description:

Displayes the software version number of the EPROM.

01 BLOCKING/DEBLOCKING

01 Display blocking state

01

01+ Make blocking

01+

01- Make deblocking

01-

Command description:

Response:

1) Blocking: Off

2) Blocking: On

3) Deblocking executed

Description:

The commands are used to make operator blocking and deblocking of the TCC411. During normal

operation, the combiner units are controlled from the connected transceivers and the TCC411 is

protected against operator commands changing the frequencies. When operator blocking is made, the

combiner is not longer controlled from the transceiver and full operator control is possible.

The 01+ and 01- commands have no effect, if the states are already present. If local deblocking 01- is

selected from On, a software reset sequence equivalent to the power-on reset sequence is executed.

Never leave the TCC411 in blocked state!!!

02 TCC RESET

02 Display command function

02

Page 4 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

02+ Execute software reset

Blocking necessary

02+

02++ Execute hardware reset

Blocking necessary

02++

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) Reset commands 02 response

2) Software reset executed 02+ response

3) Hardware reset executed 02++ response

Description:

The reset commands are used to bring the TCC411 back to a known state.

The 02+ software reset command forces the processor to start executing codes from the power-on reset

entry point. Complete initialization is made, except that blocking is maintained.

The 02++ hardware reset command will pull the CPU reset output low and make full hardware reset.

Note, that blocking will be off after hardware reset.

The hardware reset is made by stopping the trigging of the watchdog. Therefore 0.5 sec. will elapse from

the command until reset is made.

Page 5 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Combiner control commands

10 CHANNEL NUMBER

10 Display frequencies

10

10/n Display frequency

Combiner number (1..4)

10/.

10/n/+ Step up one channel

Blocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

10/./+

10/n/- Step down one channel

Blocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

10/./-

10/n/nnnn Change channel no.

Blocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

Channel number (0000..9999)

10/./....

10/n/E Go to end stop

Blocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

10/./E

10/n/EE++++ Save channel no. in EEPROM

Blocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

++++

10/./EE....

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) TC1: 0246 463.0750 0727 10 response

TC2: 0260 463.2500 0760

TC3: 0274 463.4250 0747

TC4: 0288 463.6000 0755

2) TC2: 0260 463.2500 0760 10/n response

Page 6 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

3) TC2: 0261 463.2625*0762 10/n/+, 10/n/-, 10/n/nnnn response

4) TC2: --End stop-- *2000 10/n/E response

5) TC2: --Invalid-- 0270 Response when 20 command has been used

Description:

The 10 commands are used to read-out and control the channel number settings of the combiner

sections.

The response contains four fields in each line:

1) The TC section number.

2) The selected channel number.

3) The corresponding frequency in MHz.

4) The corresponding step position of the stepper motor.

The channel number is the physical channel number and is different system channel numbers used in

TETRA and NMT signalling. The star ahead of the last field indicates, that tuning is still in progress and

the final position has not yet been reached. --End stop-- is indicated, when the position is at the

mechanical end stop. --Invalid-- is indicated, when no valid channel number (frequency) is available, e.g

when the 20 command has been used.

The 10/n/+, 10/n/- and 10/n/nnnn commands are used to change the channel numbers.

The 10/n/E command is used to put the combiner into idle position at the mechanical end stop. To

initialize to the end stop, use the 20/n/E command instead.

The 10/n/EE++++ command saves the channel number in EEPROM. This feature is only significant,

when manual operating mode has been selected with the 11 command.

11 OPERATING MODE

11 Display operating mode

11

11- Select manual operating mode

Blocking necessary

Used when the combiner is NOT controlled of the carrier unit.

11-

11+ Select automatic operating mode

Blocking necessary

Used when the combiner is controlled of the carrier unit.

11+

11/EE++++ Save operating mode in EEPROM

Blocking necessary

++++

11/EE....

Page 7 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Command description:

Response:

1) Tuning mode: Automatic

2) Tuning mode: Manual

Description:

The 11 commands are used to read-out and control tuning mode of the combiner. When used in a

DAMM base station, automatic mode shall be selected.

In automatic mode, the frequency is controlled of the connected TR411 channel unit. After power-up,

the combiner will stay in idle position until the channel unit sends channel order to the combiner on the

serial interface between each channel unit and the TCC411. The channel unit will continue to update the

channel number each 10 seconds. If the TCC411 has not received update in 20 seconds, it returns the

combiner to idle position (e.g. when a channel unit has been removed). For the functionality in the

channel unit, see the desciption for the TR 30 command.

In manual mode, the channel information from the channel unit is not recognized. After power-up, the

combiner will be set to the channel numbers stored in EEPROM with the 10 commands immediately.

12 TEST POINTS

12 Display all test points

12

12/n Display test point

Combiner number (1..4)

12/.

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) TC1 TP: 0.31 VDC 12 response

TC2 TP: 0.12 VDC

TC3 TP: 0.48 VDC

TC4 TP: 0.04 VDC

2) TC3 TP: 0.48 VDC 12/n response

Description:

The 12 commands are used to read-out the measurement values on the test points for the reflected

power from the cavity. The same value can be read-out with the 12 command on the TR.

13 FINE ADJUSTMENT

13 Display fine adjustment settings

13

Page 8 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

13/n Display fine adjustment setting

Combiner number (1..4)

13/.

13/n/+ Increment fine adjustment setting

Combiner number (1..4)

13/./+

13/n/- Decrement fine adjustment setting

Combiner number (1..4)

13/./-

13/n/snn Change fine adjustment setting

Combiner number (1..4)

Fine adjustment setting (-99..+99)

13/./...

13/n/EE++++ Save fine adjustment setting in EEPROM

Combiner number (1..4)

++++

13/./EE....

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) TC1 fine adjust: +00 13 response

TC2 fine adjust: +05

TC3 fine adjust: -03

TC4 fine adjust: +02

2) TC2 fine adjust: +05 13/n.. response

Description:

The 13 commands are used to fine adjust the cavities of the combiner. The fine adjustment offsets the

motor positions with the selected number of steps.

The fine adjustment is set to 00, when the combiner is calibrated on the factory and can be changed in

the field, when the center frequencies are not longer accurate. It is normally not necessary to use the fine

adjustment after installation.

Page 9 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Motor control commands

20 MOTOR CONTROL

20 Display motor positions

20

20/n Display motor position

Combiner number (1..4)

20/.

20/n/+ Step up motor position

Blocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

20/./+

20/n/- Step down motor position

Blocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

20/./-

20/n/nnnn Change motor position

Blocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

Motor position (0000..<end stop>)

20/./....

20/n/++ Forced step up motor position

Steps up one step even if end position was reached

Blocking necessary

Warning: End position shall be initialized afterwards to make the

position valid.

Combiner number (1..4)

20/./++

20/n/E Init to end stop

Blocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

20/./E

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) TC1: Set=0727 Cur=0727 20 response

TC2: Set=2000 Cur=2000

TC3: Set=0747 Cur=0747

Page 10 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

TC4: Set=0755 Cur=0755

2) TC4: Set=0755 Cur=0755 20/n.. response

3) TC3: *Set=0425 Cur=0741 20/n.. response, tuning

Description:

The 20 commands are used to control the stepper motors directly during test and calibration.

The response includes the selected set value and the current position. A * ahaed of Set indicates, that

tuning is active.

The 20/n/E command initializes the position to the mechanical end stop by stepping upwards steps

enough to always reach the end position. This command shall be used, if manual turn of a motor has

been made.

The 20/n/++ command steps up the motor position even when the end stop position is reached. The

command is used during factory test to check the end stop calibration. Afterwards an end stop init shall

be made to make the position valid again.

21 MOTOR CONTINUOUS UP/DOWN

21 Display command function

21

21/n/C Motor continuous up/down

Blocking necessary

Switches between End.stop-50 and End.stop-250 continuously

Stops at reception of next character

Combiner number (1..4)

21/./C

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) Motor Up/Down command 21 response

2) TC2: Motor Up/Down cont. 21/n/C response

Description:

The 21 command is used to activate continuous tuning between to fixed positions.

The function is used during factory test to check to voltage margin of the stepper motor.

Page 11 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Test commands

Description:

60 Display temperature

60

Command description:

The command displays the actual temperature.

Description:

67 Display TR serial input port levels

67

Command description:

The command displayes the physical input level on the four input pins (PD5..PD2) receiving the channel

number from the transceiver.

The command is used during factory test.

68 INPUT PORT

68 Display input port

68

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) Input port= bbbbbb b=0: Low

b=1: High

Description:

The command displayes the physical input levels on the parallel input port

1: End Stop 4

2: End Stop 3

3: End Stop 2

4: End Stop 1

5: (spare)

6: (spare)

The command is used during factory test.

NB: The command is only available in software version 2.00 or later.

Page 12 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

69 READ MEMORY LOCATION

69 Display last selected memory address

69

69/hhhh Display memory address hhhh

Memory address ($0000..$0FFF and $2000..$FFFF)

69/....

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) $hhhh=$hh Normal response

2) $hhhh=Protected $1000 to $1FFF address response

Description:

The command displays the content of a memory location. The I/O area $1000 to $1FFF is protected in

order not to disturb read handshake on I/O ports.

Page 13 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Calibration

80 CALIBRATION UNLOCK

80 Display calibration unlock selection

80

80/UNLOCK Unlock for calibration

Blocking necessary

Warning: Execute this command only for a complete recalibration of the

combiner module!!!

UNLOCK

80/......

Command description:

Response:

1) Calibration unlock: Off

2) Calibration unlock: On

Description:

The command is used to unlock for calibration during factory calibration.

Unlocking makes it possible to change the calibration values with the 8x commands. Never unlock for

calibration in the field, as it can be necessary to return the combiner to the factory for calibration, if the

settings are changed!

81 START FREQUENCY

81 Display start frequency

81

81/nnnn Change start frequency

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Start frequency in MHz (e.g. 0935 or 0460)

81/....

Command description:

Response:

1) Start frequency: 460MHz

Description:

The command is used to setup the start frequency (lowest frequency) of the combiner.

The value is used of the 10 command, when the frequency for the selected channel number is displayed.

Page 14 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

82 CHANNEL SEPARATION

82 Display channel separation

82

82/nn Change channel separation

Blocking and unlocking necessary

12: 12.5 kHz

20: 20 kHz

82/..

Command description:

Response:

1) Channel spacing: 12.5kHz

Description:

The command is used to setup channel spacing of the combiner.

The value is used of the 10 command, when the frequency for the selected channel number is displayed.

83 CALIBRATION CHANNEL SPACING

83 Display calibration channel spacing

83

83/nn Change calibration channel spacing

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Calibration channel spacing (01..99)

NMT450: 26 (10MHz BW, 12.5kHz channel separation)

NMT470: 17 (10MHz BW, 20kHz channel separation)

83/..

Command description:

Response:

1) Cal. channel spacing: 26

Description:

The command is used to setup the number of channels between each calibration point.

Value shall be: BW 1

--------------- * --

Channel spacing 31

where BW is the highest minus the lowest frequency in Hz, and channel spacing is in Hz as well. If result

is not an integer, next higher value shall be used.

Page 15 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

The value shall place all the calibration points over the used frequency range.

84 END STOP POSITION

84 Display end stop position

84

84/nnnn Change end stop position

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Note: Value is truncated to modulo 4

Motor end stop position

900MHz: typ. 3500

450MHz: typ. 2000

84/....

Command description:

Response:

1) End stop position: 2000

Description:

The command is used to setup the motor position for the mechanical end stop.

The value shall be setup to a value giving a frequency of the combiner at motor position 0 a few MHz

below the lowest used combiner frequency.

The lowest calibration point shall after calibration then contain a value of around 200..500.

85 CALIBRATION VALUES

85 Display command function

85

85/n Display calibration values

Combiner number (1..4)

85/.

85/n/nn Display calibration value

Combiner number (1..4)

Calibration point number (00..31)

85/./..

Page 16 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

85/n/nn/SET Set calibration point to current position

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

Calibration point number (00..31)

85/./../SET

85/n/nn/nnnn Change calibration point value

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Combiner number (1..4)

Calibration point number (00..31)

Motor position (0..<end stop position>)

85/./../....

Command description:

Response: Remark:

1) Calibration commands 85 response

2) ** TC2 VALUES ** 85/n response

00:0364 16:1001

01:0403 17:1041

02:0443 18:1081

03:0483 19:1121

04:0523 20:1161

05:0563 21:1201

06:0603 22:1241

07:0643 23:1281

08:0682 24:1321

09:0722 25:1361

10:0762 26:1401

11:0802 27:1441

12:0842 28:1481

13:0881 29:1522

14:0921 30:1562

15:0961 31:1603

3) TC2: 0523 85/n/nn response

Description:

The commands are used to display and change the calibration tables for the combiner.

The tables are used to convert from channel number to motor position. There are 32 calibration values

for each combiner section. To get the channel number for a specific calibration point, multiply the

calibration point number with the value entered with the 83 command. For channel numbers between the

calibration points, the TCC411 makes interpolation.

The calibration table compensates for mechanical differencies between the combiner resonators. When

the TCC411 is exchanged, the calibration values can be moved to the new TCC411.

Calibration is normally done with a computer controlled test setup in the factory. If the necessary

measuring equipment is available, calibration can also be done manually.

Page 17 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

Factory settings

90 BS TYPE

90 Display BS type selection

90

90/c Change BS type selection

Blocking necessary

BS type

A: Analog [TR451]

D: Digital [TR411]

90/.

Command description:

Response:

1) BS type: Analog [BS451]

2) BS type: Digital [BS411]

Description:

The command is used to select the type of Base Station.

When Analog is selected, the O&M serial interface is always addressed and the serial speed to TR451

is 150 bit/sec.

When Digital is selected, the O&M serial interface is addressed with the "Anc"-command and the serial

speed to TR411 is 200 bit/sec.

91 THERMOMETER SETTING

91 Display Thermometer setting

91

91/snn Change Thermometer setting

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Thermometer setting (-29..+29)

91/...

Command description:

Response:

1) Thermometer setting= snn

Description:

The command is used to calibrate the Thermometer.

Page 18 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

95 TYPE NUMBER

95 Display Item number

95

95/ccc..c Change Item number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Item number

95/............

Command description:

Response:

1) Item no.: cccccccccccc

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the item number.

The item number can consist of from 1 to 12 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the type

number on the type plate.

96 TYPE NUMBER

96 Display Type number

96

96/ccc..c Change Type number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Type number

96/............

Command description:

Response:

1) Type no.: cccccccccccc

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the type number.

The type number can consist of from 1 to 12 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the type

number on the type plate.

97 SERIAL NUMBER

97 Display Serial number

97

Page 19 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

97/nnnnnn Change 6-digit serial number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Serial number (000000..999999)

97/......

97/nnnnnnnn Change 8-digit serial number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Serial number (00000000..99999999)

97/........

Command description:

Response:

1) Serial no.: nnnnnnnn

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the serial number.

The serial number shall consist of 8 digits and shall be setup to be equal to the serial number on the type

plate.

98 VERSION NUMBER

98 Display Version number

98

98/cc..c Change Version number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Version number

98/......

Command description:

Response:

1) Version no.: cccccc

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the version number.

The version number can consist of from 1 to 6 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the

version number on the type plate.

99 REVISION NUMBER

99 Display Revision number

99

Page 20 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2007-03-10

99/cc..c Change Revision number

Blocking and unlocking necessary

Revision number

99/......

Command description:

Response:

1) Revision no.: cccccc

Description:

The commands are used to enter and display the revision number.

The revision number can consist of from 1 to 6 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the

revision number on the type plate.

Page 21 of 21Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

OM program help

OM

About the main window

The main window is a little window containing 5 big buttons, a connection-button and a menu.

The 5 big buttons control the visabillity of 5 windows: The terminal window, the device window, the

editor window, the fileview window and the help window. You can find help for these windows in the

main menu of this help file.

The menu

Logging menu

The "Logging" menu will open a logging window, where you can select a file to save the log-text to. You

can type in a filename or browse to one.

After selecting what to save in your log-file, you can either choose to append text to the file or create,

(and thereby emptying), the file.

After the logging is started you can close the window and then later return to stop the logging with the

"Stop logging" button, and start a new logging in another file.

You can also control the logging from the command line. Look for the !LOG commands for a

description of how to do that.

Options menu

The Options-window gives you the possibility to set these options:

1. Should commands and responses from your current device be shown in the terminal window.

2. Should commands and responses from your scripts be shown in the terminal window.

3. What should the timeout and line-delay values be.

4. How many characters should the terminal window hold, and what character size should be used.

5. What system should be used.

About menu

In the about window there is a copyright message and other information about the OM program.

Page 1 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

The connection button

At the bottom of the main window, is the "connection button". If you are not connected it will state: "No

connection". By pressing the button you will get a "Connection list" window. Here you can specify how

the OM should connect to your equipment.

You can specify that the OM should connect through a RS232 cable, or via a LAN.

After typing in the connection information, you can choose the line in the list and press the "connect"

button. The OM will then try to connect. After a succesful connection, the "Connection list" window will

close, the terminal window will open, and you will be able to see the connection made in the caption of

the "connection button"

After a connection through a RS232 cable via COM1 at speed 9600 Baud to a connection you have

specified as a "Base station" -connection, the button will read: Direct connection: Base station ->

COM1 9600

About the terminal

Terminal commands

Commands typed in the terminal window are usually send directly to the device you are connected to.

Some commands however, are interpreted by the OM. Most of these commands start with a "!" sign,

except the "C/" and the "R/" commands, which continue or repeats to execute the same line, with or

without scrolling the screen.

The terminal comes in handy whenever you need a fast answer. For instance: most devices will respond

with name and version when the 00 command is send

The repeat command (R/ or R|) is often used when you need to see a change in the respone from your

device. If you know a sertain command will output a different result when a sertain event happens you

can issue the repeat command and wait for the response to change.

With the mouse you can mark areas of the terminal. By either using the edit menu at the top of the

terminal, or the popupmenu (right mouse-button click), you can copy the marked text.

The terminal menus

Menu: Edit

In the Edit-menu you will find menues for copying and pasting text, for makeing a print of the terminal,

and a menu for saveing the terminal-text to a file.

By right-clicking the mouse in the terminal, you get the edit menu, as a popup- menu

Menu: Scripts

Page 2 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

The Scripts-menu has a sub-menu called "Local scripts", this menu holds all the script-files found. If you

saved your scripts in a directory, that is not your current directory, you can use the "Locate scripts...", to

change directory.

With the "Run disk-file" menu, you can locate a file to run as a script.

The "New script..." will open up the editor, and let you type in a new script.

The "Options...", will show the Options-window with the Script-page selected.

Menu: Terminal

The "Options...", will show the Options-window with the Terminal-page selected.

About the device

In the Device form, you can get an overview of sertain parts of your equipment presented in a graphical

way. For instance you can look at a line unit, reading the states of it's test-points and viewing settings.

Most presentations have popup-menus, that enable the user to select settings. For instance you can click

a test-point and a popupmenu will apear giving you the chance to select between viewing the result in

either volt or dBm.

In the statusline of the device form, you can see the device you are looking at, a led indicating the status,

and the result of a 00 command.

The device menu lets you print a "screen-dump" of the device, and open the Options window, with the

Device page selected.

After selecting a device, an updating loop is started. To stop the updating and return to the "No device",

use the Stop button.

About the editor

The editor can be used to edit and run scripts. It can also be used as a simple text editor.

The editor has functions that let you:

x) cut, copy and paste text.

x) make a search and a search/replace.

x) print the text.

About the fileview

The fileviewer let you quickly open up readable files for examination. Further more you can use it to

track changes of files. You can for instance open up a log file, and let the fileviewer watch for changes.

Whenever a new line is added to the log file the fileviewer will automatically load the line and insert it

into the fileviewer.

Page 3 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

You can put files in a list, which will be saved in the settings file of the OM.

If a file is not in the list it is possible to browse your drives for the file. The browsed files will be put in

"Files / Browsed" menu. The next time you want to view the same file you can select it in "Files /

Browsed" menu.

With the "Edit / Edit browsed / Add item to list..." you can put browsed files into the "listed files"-list.

The menu will let you open up another fileviewer, print the text, and save it into another file.

In the statusline you can see if tracking is turned on or off, how large the file is, the files date and time

settings, and the filename.

About the help

The help contains 3 levels of information. When you first display the help form, you will see a list of help

files - this is the first level. Next level is a list of either commands or help-texts. You reach this level by

choosing a help file, and pressing either enter or double-clicking it with the mouse. The last level is a

command description or the help-text.

You can step through the help by using either:

1) the mouse and the buttons: "Back" and "Description". 2) the arrow buttons, the enter and the escape

key.

The enter key is the same as a mouse double-click, the escape key is the same as the Back button.

On some commands or texts you can get a description. For instance, you can get a "Address

selection"-description. If there is a such description for a given command, the Description button will be

enabled. You can view the description by clicking the Description button or pressing Alt-D.

When you reach the command-level, the Execute button will be enabled, and if any parameters are

allowed you can insert these and execute the command.

In the status line you can see where you are in the help, and where the output from an execute will go to.

If the status line states: Output=Terminal, then the commands you choose to execute will be send to your

device attached and the command and the result from the command will be showed in the terminal. If

the status line states: Output=Editor, then the command will be send to the editor as a text string.

This is very handy when you write scripts. If you dont remember a sertain command, you can press F1

to open the help. Then you find the command in the help, write in any parameters and press enter. The

help window will then be closed, and the editor window will be shown. The command has now been

inserted at the position where you choosed to open the help.

In the menu: Output you can select where the output should go to. When writing scripts, that means you

can open the help with F1, select Terminal as output and try the command. If the result is OK, you open

the help again (F1), select Editor as output and press enter to insert the command into the editors text.

Page 4 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

TetraOM command line parameters

You can call the program with these 3 parameters:

/CONFIGPATH=path

/HELPPATH=path

/STARTUPPATH=path

CONFIGPATH

With /CONFIGPATH you tell the program where to look after the settings.wom file which contains the

programs settings.

F.x.: /CONFIGPATH=c:\TetraOM\Settings\Admin

HELPPATH

With /HELPPATH you tell the program where to look after the help files.

F.x.: /HELPPATH=c:\TetraOM\HelpFiles

STARTUPPATH

With /STARTUPPATH you can make the program change directory.

F.x.: /STARTUPPATH=c:\MyWorkingDir

You can use 1,2 or all of the parameters here, but you dont have to use any of the parameters listed here

to make the program run proberly. If no parameters are given to the program, it will simply try to find the

configuration file and the help files in the directory where the exe-file is located.

Page 5 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Commands

C/... Continuous command

Command send continuously until any key is pressed

Screen is scrolled

Command send continuously

C/............................................................

R/... Repeat command

Command repeated until any key is pressed

Screen is not scrolled

Command to repeat

R/............................................................

!WAIT(hh:mm) Wait until a specific time

Hour (00..23)

Minute (00..59)

!WAIT(..:..)

!DELAY(delay) Insert a delay, in steps of 1/10 of a second

Delay-time in steps of 1/10 of a second

!DELAY(.....)

!KEY Wait for keypress.

!KEY

!ECHO(comments) Comments to be displayed with highlighted text.

Comments to be highlighted

!ECHO(.............................................................)

Page 6 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Logging

!LOG Show logging settings

!LOG

!LOG(c,r,a,filename) Open or create logfile.

Terminal command logging ('Y','N')

Terminal response logging ('Y','N')

Append to existing file ('Y','N')

name of logfile. May include complete path.

!LOG(.,.,.,........................................)

!LOG(CREATE,filename) Create and open logfile. Empty if already exists.

Name of logfile. May include complete path.

!LOG(CREATE,..............................)

!LOG(OPEN,filename) Open logfile. Append if exists.

Name of logfile. May include complete path.

!LOG(OPEN,..............................)

!LOG(CLOSE) Close logfile

!LOG(CLOSE)

!LOG(SET,t,t,s,s,d,d) Enable/disable command/response logging

Terminal command logging ('Y','N')

Terminal response logging ('Y','N')

Script command logging ('Y','N')

Script response logging ('Y','N')

Device command logging ('Y','N')

Device response logging ('Y','N')

!LOG(SET,.,.,.,.,.,.)

Page 7 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Options

!OPT Show options settings

!OPT

!OPT(TIMEOUT,seconds) Set timeout in seconds

Timeout in seconds

!OPT(TIMEOUT,..)

!OPT(LINEDELAY,ms) Set linedelay in milliseconds

Linedelay in milliseconds (0..9999)

!OPT(LINEDELAY,....)

!OPT(ECHO,s,s,d,d) Enable/disable echoing in terminal

Echo script commands ('Y','N')

Echo script responses ('Y','N')

Echo device commands ('Y','N')

Echo device responses ('Y','N')

!LOG(ECHO,.,.,.,.)

!OPT(TERMWIN,xxx,yyy) Set terminal window size

X-size (80..160)

Y-size (25..100)

!OPT(TERMWIN,...,...)

!OPT(TERMFONTSIZE,s) Set terminal font size

Size of font (0..4)

!OPT(TERMFONTSIZE,.)

Page 8 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Connections

!CONN Show number of items in connection list

!CONN

!CONN(D,co,ba,a,n) Direct

COM port (1..18)

Baud speed (03,06,12,24,48,96,19,38,57,11)

Send A900+ ('Y','N')

Name of connection

!CONN(D,..,..,.,..............................)

!CONN(M,co,ba,a,n) Direct modem

COM port (1..18)

Baud speed (03,06,12,24,48,96,19,38,57,11)

Send A900+ ('Y','N')

Name of connection

!CONN(M,..,..,.,..............................)

!CONN(U,co,ba,ph,da,dti,rw,ati,a,n) Dialup modem

COM port (1..18)

Baud speed (03,06,12,24,48,96,19,38,57,11)

Phonenumber

Dial attempts

Dial timeout

Retry wait

Answer timeout

Send A900+ ('Y','N')

Name of connection

!CONN(U,..,..,....................,..,...,..,...,.,.....................)

!CONN(N,ip,a,n) Network

IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

Send A900+ ('Y','N')

Name of connection

!CONN(N,...............,.,..............................)

Page 9 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Connect

!CONNECT(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) Connects to a new BSC

IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

!CONNECT(...............)

Page 10 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Disconnect

!DISCONNECT Disconnects from the current BSC

!DISCONNECT

Page 11 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Fileview settings

!FILEVIEW Show number of items in the file view list

!FILEVIEW

!FILEVIEW(name,teof,file) Insert item in file view list

Name (fx.: Config)

Track End-Of-File ('Y','N')

Filename (fx.: c:\config.sys)

!FILEVIEW(....................,.,................................)

Page 12 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Editor commands

EDITING COMMANDS

The editing commands supported by the editor are arranged by category in the list below. In each case

the first column give a brief description of the command. The following column descripes the key(s) to

wich a command is assigned.

CURSER MOVEMENT:

Curser left one character <Left>

Curser right one character <Right>

Curser up one line <Up>

Curser Down one line <Down>

Curser left one word <Ctrl+Left>

Curser right one word <Ctrl+Right>

Curser to begining of line <Home>

Curser to end of line <End>

Curser to top of edit window <Ctrl+PageUp>

Curser to end of edit window <Ctrl+PageDown>

Curser to beginning of file <Ctrl+Home>

Curser to end of file <Ctrl+End>

Scroll display one page up <PageUp>

Scroll display one page down <PageDown>

INSERTION AND DELETION:

Delete character at cursor <Del>

Delete character to left of cursor <Bksp>

Start a new line <Enter>

BLOCK COMMANDS:

Mark <Shift> + cursor

movement

Unmark cursor movement

Copy marked block to clipboard <Ctrl+C>

Cut marked block to clipboard <Ctrl+X>

Insert block from clipboard <Ctrl+V>

Delete marked block <Del>

SEARCH AND REPLACE:

Search <Alt+S>+<F>

Search and replace <Alt+S>+<R>

MODE TOGGLES:

Toggle insert mode <Ins>

Toggle Upper/Lower case <Caps Lock>

Page 13 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

UNDO:

Undo <Ctrl-Z>

Page 14 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

SET command

:SET(var,value) Set variable value

Name of variable

Value

:SET(........,...........)

Command description:

The SET command creates variables in a seperate array. You can only use the variables in scripts. The

variables can have the same names as variables used in the ':FOR' / ':NEXT' commands.

The SET-variables are case sensitive, this means that 'thisvar' and 'ThisVar' are two different variables.

You can use hexadecimal numbers by inserting a '$' in front of the value.

Creating variables: x) :SET(y,1) - y with a value of 1 x) :SET(y,$A) - y with a value of 10 x) :SET

(y,=2) - y with a value of 2 x) :SET(y,=$AA) - y with a value of 170

You can change the value of the variables using the '+','-' and '=' signs in a :SET-command.

x) :SET(y,+10) - add 10 to the value of y. x) :SET(y,-$10) - subtract 16 from the value of y. x) :SET

(y,=10) - set y-varaible to 10.

You use variables by inserting them in a pair of '%'-signs:

:SET(x,=10) %x%

the output of the second line is '10'. If the output should be hexadecimal you can insert a '$'. 1%$x%

will output: '1A'.

You can left pad. 1%$x,3% will output: '100A'.

Page 15 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

For - Next Loops

:FOR(var,start,end) Define the start of a FOR/NEXT loop.

Name of counter variable

Start value

End value

:FOR(........,.....,.....)

:FOR(var,start,end,stepsize) Define the start of a FOR/NEXT loop.

Name of counter variable

Start value

End value

Steps for counting from <Start> to <End>

:FOR(........,.....,.....,.....)

:NEXT(var) Repeat or end last defined FOR loop

Name of counter variable

:NEXT(........)

Page 16 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Labels, jumps, conditional jumps.

:LABEL(labelname) Set destination of jumps.

Name of label

:LABEL(........)

:GOTO(labelname) Continue processing at a label.

Name of label to jump to.

:GOTO(........)

:IFNORESP(nextlabel) Jump, if no response on communication-port.

Label to continue at, if a "NO xx RESPONSE" was received on the

communication port.

:IFNORESP(........)

:IFTIMEOUT(nextlabel) Jump, if general fault, on communication-port.

Label to continue at, if a timeout, or out fatal error

occoured on the communication port.

:IFTIMEOUT(.........)

:IFINVALID(nextlabel) Jump, if reponse contained 'INVALID'

Label to continue at, if the last received string contained

the substring 'INVALID'.

:IFINVALID(.........)

:IFEOD(nextlabel) Jump, if end of data-marker was read.

Label to continue at, if the first three characters in the last

received response on the communication-port, was "***".

:IFEOD(........)

Page 17 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S

Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Doc. No. Rev. Date

Description

2001-08-20

Special commands

:TIMEOUT(time) Setup timeout time on RS232 port

Timeout in seconds.

:TIMEOUT(..)

:EXECUTE(filename) Send file to port.

Name of file to send to port, line by line.

:EXECUTE(..........................)

:INCLUDE(filename) Include file into command-list.

Name of file to include in command-list. All command will be

interpreted as if they where located within the editor.

:INCLUDE(.........................)

:SEND(....) Send command containing variables.

Commands to send. Variables from :FOR-statements must be specified

as %Name,Length% where Name is the variable identifier, and Length

is the lenght of the desired string, to be padded with leading zeros

:SEND(...................................................)

<cmd> Send command

Command to send.

Optional remarks can be entered

after a ";"

................................... ; .........................

Page 18 of 18Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S